FACULTY OF ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY
CURRICULUM, PRE-REQUISITES/ CO-REQUISITES
CHART, AND SYLLABUS FOR B.TECH
UNDER CHOICE BASED FLEXIBLE CREDIT SYSTEM
REGULATIONS 2015
(For students admitted from 2015-16 onwards)
Specialization : Nanotechnology
Offering Department : Physics and Nanotechnology
Placed in the 32nd Academic Council Meeting held on 23rd July 2016
i NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
CONTENTS
COURSE
CODE TOPIC / COURSE TITLE
PAGE
NUMBER
Student Outcomes And C-D-I-O
Symbols and Abbreviations
Curriculum – Core Courses
Curriculum – Elective Courses
Pre/Co Requisites List
Pre/Co Requisites Flow Chart
iv
v
vi
viii
ix
xi
YEAR – I, SEMESTER - II
15NT101 Elements of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology 1
YEAR – II, SEMESTER - I
15NT201 Fundamentals of Solid State Engineering 3
15NT202 Nanoscale Chemistry 5
15NT202L Nanoscale Chemistry Laboratory 7
15NT203J Micro/Nanoscale Imaging and Analysis 8
YEAR – II SEMESTER - II
15NT204 Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics for Nano Systems 11
15NT205 Quantum Mechanics for Nanotechnologists 14
15NT206 Biological Principles for Nanoscale Science and Engineering 16
15NT207 Design, Synthesis and Characterisation of Nanoscale Materials 18
15NT207L Design, Synthesis and Characterisation of Nanoscale Materials Laboratory 20
YEAR – III, SEMESTER - I
15NT301 Nanophotonics 21
15NT302 Nanotoxicology and Nanotechnology Engineering Practice 23
15NT303 Nanobiotechnology 25
15NT303L Nanobiotechnology Laboratory 27
15NT375L Minor Project I 28
15NT380L Seminar I 30
15NT385L Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCs) I 32
15NT390L Internship / Industrial Training I 33
15NT490L Industry Module I 34
YEAR – III, SEMESTER - II
15NT304 Nanoelectronics 35
15NT304L Nanoelectronics Simulation Laboratory 37
15NT305 Micro and Nanofabrication 38
15NT305L Micro and Nanofabrication Laboratory 40
YEAR – IV, SEMESTER - I
15NT401M Multi-Disciplinary Design 41
15NT403 Nanomagnetism 43
15NT404 Polymer and Nanocomposites 45
15NT404L Polymer and Nanocomposites Laboratory 47
15NT405 Industrial Nanotechnology 48
ii NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
COURSE
CODE TOPIC / COURSE TITLE
PAGE
NUMBER
15NT376L Minor Project II 50
15NT381L Seminar II 52
15NT386L Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCs) II 54
15NT391L Internship / Industrial Training II 55
15NT491L Industry Module II 56
YEAR – IV, SEMESTER - II
15NT496L Major Project 57
ELECTIVE COURSES
Department Elective – I, II, III & IV
15NT301E Carbon Nanotechnology 59
15NT302E Physics of Solid State Devices 61
15NT303E Molecular Spectroscopy and its Applications 63
15NT304E Nanotribology 65
15NT305E Nanotechnology Legal Aspects 67
15NT306E Lithography Techniques and Fabrication 69
15NT307E Smart Sensor Systems 71
15NT308E 2-D Layered Nanomaterials 73
15NT309E Supramolecular Systems 75
15NT310E MEMS and NEMS 77
15NT311E Surface and Interfaces 79
15NT312E Nanotechnology in Agriculture and Food Processing 82
15NT313E Advanced Drug Delivery Systems 84
15NT314E Nanomedicine 86
15NT315E Microelectronics and VLSI 88
15NT316E Introduction to Scientific Research 90
15NT317E Nanocatalysts 92
15NT321E Nano and Micro Emulsions 94
Department Elective – V & VI
15NT401E Nanorobotics 96
15NT402E Micro and Nanofluidics 98
15NT403E Nanotechnology for Energy Systems 100
15NT404E Photovoltaic Technology 102
15NT405E Nanotechnology in Cosmetics 104
15NT406E Green Nanotechnology 106
15NT407E Nanocomputing 108
15NT408E Nanotechnology in Textiles 110
15NT409E Cancer Nanotechnology 112
15NT410E Polymer Engineering 114
15NT411E Atomistic Modeling 116
iii NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
COURSE
CODE TOPIC / COURSE TITLE
PAGE
NUMBER
15NT412E Societal Implications of Nanotechnology 118
15NT413E Nanotechnology in Tissue Engineering 120
Courses Customised to Other Departments (EIE)
15NT318E Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics 122
Courses offered/ customized by Other Departments to B.Tech.
Nanotechnology
15EI251 Electronics and Instrumentation 124
15EI251L Electronics and Instrumentation Laboratory 126
15ME216 Introduction to Manufacturing Engineering 127
15MH311 Elements of Mechatronics Systems 129
15MH312L Mechatronics Systems Laboratory 131
iv NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
STUDENT OUTCOMES
The curriculum and syllabus for B.Tech programs (2013) conform to outcome based teaching learning process. In
general, ELEVEN STUDENT OUTCOMES (a-k) have been identified and the curriculum and syllabus have been
structured in such a way that each of the courses meets one or more of these outcomes. Student outcomes describe
what students are expected to know and be able to do by the time of graduation. These relate to the skills, knowledge,
and behaviors that students acquire as they progress through the program. Further each course in the program spells
out clear instructional objectives which are mapped to the student outcomes.
The student outcomes are:
(a) an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering
(b) an ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret data
(c) an ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints such as
economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health and safety, manufacturability, and sustainability
(d) an ability to function on multidisciplinary teams
(e) an ability to identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems
(f) an understanding of professional and ethical responsibility
(g) an ability to communicate effectively
(h) the broad education necessary to understand the impact of engineering solutions in global, economic,
environmental, and societal context
(i) a recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in life-long learning
(j) a knowledge of contemporary issues
(k) an ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for engineering practice.
C-D-I-O Initiative
The CDIO Initiative (CDIO is a trademarked initialism for Conceive — Design — Implement — Operate) is an
innovative educational framework for producing the next generation of engineers. The framework provides students
with an education stressing engineering fundamentals set in the context of Conceiving — Designing — Implementing
— Operating real-world systems and products. Throughout the world, CDIO Initiative collaborators have adopted
CDIO as the framework of their curricular planning and outcome-based assessment.
In the syllabus, every topic has been classified under one or more of C-D-I-O so that students and faculty alike are
clear about the scope of learning to take place under each one of the topics.
v NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS
B -- Courses under Basic Science and Mathematics
BT -- Biotechnology Courses
C-D-I-O -- Conceive-Design-Implement-Operate
CE -- Civil Engineering Courses
CS -- Computer Science and Engineering Courses
CY -- Chemistry Courses
E with course code -- Elective Courses
E -- Courses under Engineering Sciences
EC -- Electronics and Communication Engineering Courses
EE
EI
--
--
Electrical and Electronics Engineering Courses
Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Courses
G -- Courses under Arts and Humanities
IOs
J with course code
--
--
Instructional Objectives
Theory cum Laboratory courses
L -- Laboratory / Project / Industrial Training Courses
LE -- Language Courses
L-T-P-C -- L- Lecture Hours Per Week
T- Tutorial Hours Per Week
P- Practical Hours Per Week
C- Credits for a Course
M with course code -- Courses with Multi-Disciplinary Content
MA -- Mathematics Courses
ME -- Mechanical Engineering Courses
MH
MOOCs
--
--
Mechatronics Engineering Courses
Massive Open Online Courses
NC -- NCC- National Cadet Corps
NS
NT
--
--
NSS – National Service Scheme
Nanotechnology Courses
P -- Professional Core Courses
PD -- Personality Development Courses
PY -- Physics Courses
SO/SOs -- Student Outcomes (a-k)
SP -- NSO- National Sports Organization
YG -- Yoga Course
ix
PRE/CO REQUISITES LIST B. Tech Nanotechnology
Under Choice Based Flexible Credit System (CBFCS) - for students admitted from the academic year 2015 - 2016 onwards
Course Code Course Title Prerequisite course
Co requisite courses
15NT101 Elements of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology Nil Nil 15NT201 Fundamentals of Solid State Engineering Nil Nil 15NT202 Nanoscale Chemistry Nil Nil
15NT202L Nanoscale Chemistry Laboratory Nil 15NT202 15NT203J Micro/Nanoscale Imaging and Analysis Nil Nil 15NT204 Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics for Nano
Systems Nil Nil
15NT205 Quantum Mechanics for Nanotechnologists Nil Nil 15NT206 Biological Principles for Nanoscale Science and
Engineering Nil Nil
15NT207 Design, Synthesis and Characterisation of Nanoscale Materials
15NT202 Nil
15NT207L Design, Synthesis and Characterisation of Nanoscale Materials Laboratory
Nil 15NT207
15NT301 Nanophotonics Nil Nil15NT302 Nanotoxicology and Nanotechnology Engineering
Practice Nil Nil
15NT303 Nanobiotechnology 15NT206 Nil
15NT303L Nanobiotechnology Laboratory Nil 15NT303 15NT304 Nanoelectronics 15NT201 Nil
15NT304L Nanoelectronics Simulation Laboratory Nil 15NT304 15NT305 Micro and Nanofabrication Nil Nil
15NT305L Micro and Nanofabrication Laboratory Nil 15NT305 15NT401M Multi-Disciplinary Design Course 15NT403 Nanomagnetism Nil Nil15NT404 Polymer and Nanocomposites Nil Nil
15NT404L Polymer and Nanocomposites Laboratory Nil 15NT404 15NT405 Industrial Nanotechnology Nil Nil
Department Elective – I, II, III &IV 15NT301E Carbon Nanotechnology Nil Nil 15NT302E Physics of Solid State Devices Nil Nil 15NT303E Molecular Spectroscopy and its Applications Nil Nil 15NT304E Nanotribology Nil Nil 15NT305E Nanotechnology Legal Aspects Nil Nil 15NT306E Lithography Techniques and Fabrication Nil Nil 15NT307E Smart Sensor Systems Nil Nil 15NT308E 2-D Layered Nanomaterials Nil Nil 15NT309E Supramolecular Systems Nil Nil 15NT310E Mems and Nems Nil Nil 15NT311E Surface and Interfaces Nil Nil 15NT312E Nanotechnology in Agriculture and Food Processing Nil Nil 15NT313E Advanced Drug Delivery Systems Nil Nil 15NT314E Nanomedicine Nil Nil 15NT315E Microelectronics and VLSI Nil Nil 15NT316E Introduction to Scientific Research Nil Nil 15NT317E Nanocatalysts Nil Nil 15NT321E Nano and Micro Emulsions Nil Nil
x
Note: Few Core/Elective courses will be listed as Open Electives for other departments based on the availability of resources and demand
Department Elective – V, Vi 15NT401E Nanorobotics 15MH311 Nil 15NT402E Micro and Nanofluidics Nil Nil 15NT403E Nanotechnology for Energy Systems Nil Nil 15NT404E Photovoltaic Technology Nil Nil 15NT405E Nanotechnology in Cosmetics Nil Nil 15NT406E Green Nanotechnology Nil Nil 15NT407E Nanocomputing Nil Nil 15NT408E Nanotechnology in Textiles Nil Nil 15NT409E Cancer Nanotechnology Nil Nil 15NT410E Polymer Engineering Nil Nil 15NT411E Atomistic Modeling 15NT205 Nil 15NT412E Societal Implications of Nanotechnology Nil Nil 15NT413E Nanotechnology in Tissue Engineering Nil Nil
Course Offered/ Customised to E&I Department 15NT318E Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics Nil Nil
Course Offered/Customised by other Departments to B.Tech. Nanotechnology
15EI251 Electronics and Instrumentation Nil Nil 15EI251L Electronics and Instrumentation Laboratory Nil 15EI251 15MH311 Elements of Mechatronics Systems Nil Nil
15MH312L Mechatronics Systems Laboratory Nil 15MH311 15ME216 Introduction to Manufacturing Engineering Nil Nil
15LE101 2 Cr 15PD101 1 Cr 15MA101 4 Cr 15PY101 3 Cr 15PY101L 1 Cr 15CY101 3 Cr 15CY101L 1 Cr 15BT101 2 Cr 15CE101 2 Cr 15EE101 2 Cr 15ME105L 3 Cr 15CS101L 2 Cr
15LE102 2 Cr 15PD102 1 Cr
15NC101/ 15NS101/ 15SP101/ 15YG101
1 Cr 15MA102 4 Cr 15PY102L 3 Cr 15CY102 2 Cr 15ME101 2 Cr 15EC101 2 Cr 15ME104L 2 Cr 15NT101 3 Cr
15LE201E/ 15LE202E/ 15LE203E/ 15LE204E/ 15LE205E
2 Cr 15PD201 1 Cr 15MA202 4 Cr 15EI251 3 Cr 15EI251L 1 Cr 15NT201 3 Cr 15NT202 3 Cr 15NT202L 2 Cr 15NT203J 4 Cr
15LE207E/ 15LE208E/ 15LE209E/ 15LE210E/ 15LE211E
2 Cr 15PD202 1 Cr 15MA209 4 Cr 15ME216 2 Cr 15NT204 3 Cr 15NT205 3 Cr 15NT206 3 Cr 15NT207 3 Cr 15NT207L 2 Cr
xi
15PD301 1 Cr 15MA206 4 Cr 15NT301 3 Cr 15NT302 3 Cr 15NT303 3 Cr 15NT303L 2 Cr 15NTXXXE 3 Cr
15NT375L / 15NT380L / 15NT385L/1
5NT490L
2 Cr 15NT390L 1 Cr 3 Cr
15PD302 1 Cr 15MH311 3Cr 15MH312L 1 Cr 15NT304 3 Cr 15NT304L 1 Cr 15NT305 3 Cr 15NT305L 2 Cr 15NTXXXE 3 Cr 3 Cr
15NT401M 3 Cr 15NT403 3 Cr 15NT404 3 Cr 15NT404L 2 Cr 15NT405 3 Cr 15NTXXXE 3 Cr
15NT376L / 15NT381L /
15NT386L/15NT491L
2Cr 15NT391L 1 Cr
15NT496L 12 Cr
Course 1 Course 2 Course 1 Course 2
Programming Laboratory
Course # 1 is a prerequisite for Course # 2
Nanoscale Chemistry
Department Elective - I
English Soft Skills - I Biology for Engineers
Value Education Soft Skills - II
NCC - National Cadet Corps / NSS- National Service Scheme / NSO-
National Sports Organization / Yoga
Chemistry Chemistry Laboratory
Biological Principles for Nanoscale Science and
Engineering
Department Elective - V, VI
Internship / Industrial Training II
Micro and Nanofabrication Laboratory
German Language - I / French Language - I /
Japanese Language - I / Korean Language - I / Chinese Language - I
Quantitative Aptitude & Logical Reasoning - I
German Language - II / French Language - II/
Japanese Language - II/ Korean Language - II/ Chinese Language - II
Verbal Aptitude
Major Project
Mechatronics Systems Laboratory
Nanoelectronics
Industrial NanotechnologyMulti-Disciplinary Design NanomagnetismPolymer and
Nanocomposites
Communication and Reasoning Skills
Electronics and Instrumentation Laboratory
Nanoelectronics Simulation Laboratory
Department Elective - II,III,IV
Open Elective II
Basic Electronics Engineering
Workshop PracticeElements of Nanoscience
and Nanotechnology
Internship / Industrial Training I
Minor Project I / Seminar I / Massive open Online
Courses (MOOCs) I/Industry Module I
Design, Synthesis and Characterisation of
Nanoscale Materials
Design, Synthesis and Characterisation of
Nanoscale Materials Laboratory
Nanoscale Chemistry Laboratory
Micro/Nanoscale Imaging and Analysis
Open Elective I
B. TECH NANOTECHNOLOGYPREREQUISITES AND CO REQUISITES FLOW CHART
Engineering Graphics
SEMESTER 1
SEMESTER 2
Physics LaboratoryCalculus and Solid
GeometryPhysics Basic Civil Engineering
Basic Electrical Engineering
Principles of Environmental Science
Materials ScienceAdvanced Calculus and
Complex AnalysisBasic Mechanical
Engineering
Under Choice Based Flexible Credit System (CBFCS) - for students admitted from the academic year 2015 - 2016 onwards
Course # 1 is a Co Requisite for Course # 2
SEMESTER 7
SEMESTER 8
SEMESTER 4
SEMESTER 6
SEMESTER 5
Elements of Mechatronics Systems
Numerical Methods Nanophotonics
Probability and Random Process
Nanotoxicology and Nanotechnology
Engineering Practice
Polymer and Nanocomposites
Laboratory
Quantitative Aptitude & Logical Reasoning - II
Introduction to Manufacturing Engineering
Nanobiotechnology Laboratory
Nanobiotechnology
Minor Project II / Seminar II / Massive Open Online
Courses(MOOCs) II/Industry Module II
SEMESTER 3
Fourier Series, Partial Differential Equations and
their Applications
Electronics and Instrumentation
Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics for
Nano Systems
Quantum Mechanics for Nanotechnologists
Fundamentals of Solid State Engineering
Micro and Nanofabrication
1 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT101 Elements of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanoscience
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To enable the students to learn the basics of nanoscience and nanotechnology
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the fundamentals of nanotechnology a
2. Give a general introduction to different classes of nanomaterials a
3. Improve their knowledge on various synthesis methods of nanomaterials e
4. Understand characterization techniques involved in nanotechnology e
5. Familiarize themselves with nanotechnology potentialities d
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Basics and Scale of Nanotechnology 9
1. Introduction and scientific revolutions 1 C 1 1-5
2. Time and length scale in structures 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
3. Definition of a nanosystem 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
4. Dimensionality and size dependent phenomena 1 C 1 1,2,3
5. Surface to volume ratio 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
6. Fraction of surface atoms and surface energy 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
7. Surface stress and surface defects 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
8. Properties at nanoscale – optical & mechanical 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
9. Properties at nanoscale – electronic & magnetic 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
Unit II: Different Classes of Nanomaterials 9
10. Classification based on dimensionality 1 C 2 1,2,3
11. Quantum dots, wells and wires 1 C 2 1,2,3
12. Carbon-based nano materials – fullerences and buckyballs 1 C 2 1,2,3
13. Carbon nanotubes and graphene 1 C 2 1,2,3
14. Metal based nano materials – Nanogold and Nanosilver 1 C 2 1,2,3
15. Metal oxide based nano materials 1 C 2 1,2,3
16. Nanocomposites and nanopolymers 1 C 2 1,2,3
17. Nanoglasses and nano ceramics 1 C 2 1,2,3
18. Biological nanomaterials 1 C 2 1,2,3
Unit III: Synthesis of Nanomaterials 8
19. Chemical methods: Metal nanocrystals by reduction 1 C 3 1,2,3
20. Solvothermal synthesis and photochemical synthesis 1 C 3 1,2,3
21. Sonochemical routes and chemical vapor deposition (CVD) 1 C 3 1,2,3
22. Metal oxide chemical vapor deposition (MOCVD) 1 C 3 1,2,3
23. Physical methods: Ball milling 1 C 3 1,2,3
24. Electrodeposition techniques 1 C 3 1,2,3
25. Spray pyrolysis and flame pyrolysis 1 C 3 1,2,3
26. DC/RF magnetron sputtering, Molecular beam epitaxy (MBE) 1 C 3 1,2,3
Unit IV: Fabrication and Characterization of
Nanostructures 8
27. Nanofabrication: Photolithography and its limitation and
electron beam lithography (EBL) 1 C 4 1,2,3
28. Nanoimprinting and soft lithography patterning 1 C 4 1,2,3
29. Characterization: Field emission scanning electron
microscopy (FESEM) and environmental scanning electron
microscopy (ESEM)
1 C 4 1,2,3
30. High resolution transmission electron microscope (HRTEM) 1 C 4 1,2,3
2 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
31. Scanning tunneling microscope (STM) 1 C 4 1,2,3
32. Surface enhanced raman spectroscopy (SERS) 1 C 4 1,2,3
33. X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS) 1 C 4 1,2,3
34. Auger electron spectroscopy (AES), Rutherford backscattering
spectroscopy (RBS) 1 C 4 1,2,3
Unit V: Applications in Nanotechonology 8
35. Solar energy conversion and catalysis 1 C 5 1,2,3
36. Molecular electronics, nanoelectronics and printed electronics 1 C 5 1,2,3
37. Polymers with a special architecture, liquid crystalline systems 1 C 5 1,2,3
38. Linear and nonlinear optical and electro-optical properties 1 C 5 1,2,3
39. Applications - nanomaterials for data storage 1 C 5 1,2,3
40. Photonics and plasmonics 1 C 5 1,2,3
41. Chemical and biosensors 1 C 5 1,2,3
42. Nanomedicine and nanobiotechnology, Nanotoxicology
challenges 1 C 5 1,2,3
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1 T. Pradeep, “A Textbook of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd.,
2012
2 Hari Singh Nalwa, “Nanostructured Materials and Nanotechnology”, Academic Press, 2008
3 A.Nabok, “Organic and Inorganic Nanostructures”, Artech House, 2009
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
4 C.Dupas, P.Houdy, M.Lahmani, “Nanoscience: Nanotechnologies and Nanophysics”, Springer-Verlag
Berlin Heidelberg, 2007
5 A. S. Edelstein and R. C. Cammarata, “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and Applications”, Institute
of Physics Pub., 2001
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
3 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT201 Fundamentals of Solid State Engineering L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanoscience
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To teach fundamental scientific concepts essential to solid state engineering so that students are
capable of taking more advanced courses in the field of materials science.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Familiarize with the physics of crystalline solids and elastic properties a
2. Acquire knowledge on lattice dynamics, transport properties and optical
processes in solids a e
3. Understand quantum mechanical concepts of free electron and band
theory of solids
a
4. Gain theoretical knowledge on optical properties, electron-phonon
interactions in solids and in modern hetero structures
a
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours IOs Reference
Unit I: Crystal Binding and Elastic Constants 9
1. Introduction to interatomic forces 1 C 1 1,2
2. Van der Waals – London interaction 1 C 1 1
3. Equilibrium lattice constants and cohesive energy 1 C 1,2 1
4. Ionic crystals 1 C 1,2 1,2
5. Madelung energy and Madelung constant 1 C,D 1,2 1
6. Evaluation of the Madelung constant 1 C,D 1,2 1,2
7. Covalent, metallic and hydrogen bonding 1 C 1,2 1
8. Hook’s law: elastic strain components, dilation 1 C 1,2 1
9. Stress components, elastic compliance and stiffness constants 1 C 1,2 1
Unit II: Crystal Diffraction, Vibrations and Thermal
Properties 9
10. Crystal diffraction – Bragg’s law 1 C 1-3 1,2,5
11. Reciprocal lattice vectors, concept of Brillouin zones 1 C 1-3 1,2,5
12. Vibration of crystals with monoatomic basis 1 C 2,3 1,2
13. First Brillouin zone 1 C 2,3 1,2
14. Group velocity, quantization of elastic waves (concept of
phonon) 1 C,D 2-4 1,2
15. Phonon heat capacity: Planck’s distribution and normal modes 1 C 2-4 1
16. Density of states in one and three dimensions 1 C,D 2-4 1
17. Debye model for density of states - T3 law 1 C 2,3 1,2
18. Einstein model for density of states 1 C 2,3 1,2
Unit III: Free Electron Fermi Gas: Transport Phenomena 8
19. Free electron gas in one dimensions, Fermi- Dirac distribution 1 C 3 1,2,4
20. Effect of temperature on the Fermi – Dirac distribution function 1 C 3 1,2,4
21. Free electron gas in three dimensions: Fermi energy 1 C,D 3 1,2,4
22. Density of states 1 C 2-4 1,4
23. Heat capacity of the electron gas 1 C 2-4 1,4
24. Electrical conductivity and Ohm’s law 1 C 2,3 1,2
25. Electrical resistivity: Matthiessen’s rule 1 C 2,3 1-5
26. Motion in magnetic fields: cyclotron frequency, Hall effect,
thermal conductivity of metals – Wiedemann-Franz law 1 C,D 2,3 1-5
Unit IV: Energy Bands and Semiconductor Crystals 8
27. Nearly free electron model: origin of the energy bands 1 C 2-4 1,2,4
4 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
28. Bloch functions and Kronig-Penney model 1 C 2-4 1,2,4
29. Wave equation of electron in a periodic potential 1 C 2-4 1,2,4
30. Metals and insulators in energy band concept 1 C 2-4 1,2,4
31. Semiconductors: direct and indirect band gap 1 C 2-4 1-5
32. Equations of motions: concept of holes and effective mass 1 C 2-4 1-5
33. Intrinsic carrier concentration and mobility 1 C,D 2-4 1,2,3
34. Impurity conductivity: donor and acceptor states, semimetals,
super lattices and Zener tunneling 1 C,D 2-4 1,2,4
Unit V: Optical Properties of Solids 8
35. Optical reflectance 1 C 1-4 1,2,4
36. Kramers-Kronig relations 1 C 1-4 1,2,4
37. Electronic interband transitions 1 C 1-4 1,2,4
38. Concept of excitons and energy level diagram 1 C 1-4 1,2,4
39. Frenkel excitons: Alkali halides and molecular crystals 1 C 2-4 1,2,4
40. Mott-Wannier excitons 1 C 2-4 1,2,4
41. Raman effect in crystals 1 C 2-4 1,2,4
42. Concept of plasmons – derivation of plasma frequency, basic
concept of polaritons and polarons (qualitative treatment) 1 C 2-4 1,2,4
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. Text Books
1. C. Kittel, “Introduction to Solid State Physics”, 8th edition, Wiley India, 2015
2. M. Ali Omar, “Elementary Solid State Physics-Principles and Applications”, Pearson Publication, 2005
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
3. Herald Ibach, Hans Luth, “Solid State Physics-An Introduction to Principles of Materials Science”, Springer
Publication, 2009
4. J.M. Ziman, “Principles of Theory of Solids”, Cambridge University Press, 1999
5. A. J. Dekker, “Solid State Physics”, Macmillan India Ltd, 2004
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool
Cycle test
I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
5 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT202 Nanoscale Chemistry L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanoscience
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To acquire basic knowledge in chemistry aspects of nanotechnology
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1 Understand the role of chemistry in nanoparticle synthesis a
2 Improve their ability in understanding the behavior of
nanomaterials based on its chemistry a e
3 Acquire knowledge about size effects and reaction kinetics at
nanoscale a e
4 Enhance knowledge about the various nanosynthesis techniques a
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Chemical Bonding and Physical Chemistry of Solid
Surfaces 9
1. Introduction to chemical bonding 1 C 1-4 5
2. Atomic bonding, types of bond: metallic, ionic bond 1 C 1 5
3. Covalent and Vander Waals bond 1 C 1 5
4. Surface energy, chemical potential as a function of curvature 1 C,D 1 5
5. Electrostatic stabilization 1 C 1 5
6. Surface charge density 1 C,D 1 5
7. Electric potential at the proximity at solid surface 1 C 1 3,5
8. Vander Waals attraction potential 1 C 1 3,5
9. DLVO theory and steric stabilization 1 C 1 3,5
Unit II: Phase Transition in Nanocrystals 9
10. Crystalline phase transitions in nanocrystals 1 C 2,3 1,5
11. Phase transitions and grain size dependence 1 C 2,3 1,5
12. Elementary thermodynamics of the grain size 1 C 2,3 1,5
13. Dependence of phase transitions 1 C 2,3 1,5
14. Influence of the surface or interface on nanocrystals 1 C 2,3 1,5
15. Modification of transition barriers 1 C 2,3 1,5
16. Geometric evolution of the lattice in nanocrystals-grain size 1 C 2,3 1,5
17. Dependence, influence of the nanocrystal surface or interface
on the lattice parameter 1 C 2,3 1,5
18. Is there a continuous variation of the crystal state within
nanocrystals? 1 C 2,3 1,5
Unit III: Materials Structure and Features of Nanoscale
Growth 8
19. Space lattice and unit cells, crystal system, symmetry operation 1 C 3 6
20. Structures of common metallic, semiconductor ceramic and
superconductor materials 1 C 3 6
21. Miller indices, representation of directions 1 C,D 3 6
22. Planes packing fractions, structure determination using X-ray
diffraction 1 C,D 3 6
23. Silicates and clay structures, glass transition temperature 1 C 3 6
24. Non-crystalline materials, imperfections 1 C 3 6
25. Specific features of nanoscale growth , size control, triggering
the phase transition 1 C 3 1,6
26. Application to solid nanoparticles controlling nucleation ,
controlling growth -controlling aggregation, stability of 1 C 3 1,6
6 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
colloidal dispersions - breaking matter into pieces
Unit IV: Supercritical Fluid and Cryochemistry of Metal
Nanoparticle 8
27. Supercritical fluids-introduction 1 C,D 3 1
28. Physicochemical properties: solubility, viscosity , diffusion 1 C,D 3 1
29. Thermal conductivity and applications 1 C,D 3,4 1,4
30. Purification and extraction , synthesis 1 C,D 3,4 1,4
31. Cryochemistry of metals- silver and other metals 1 C,D 3,4 1,4
32. Stabilization by polymers 1 C,D 3,4 1,4
33. Stabilization by mesogenes 1 C,D 3,4 1,4
34.
Reactions of rare-earth elements activity, selectivity, and size
effects -reactions at super low temperatures reactions of silver
particles of various sizes and shapes
1 C,D 3,4 1,4
Unit V: Synthesis of Nanoparticles 8
35. Chemical precipitation method 1 C,D 4 3,4
36. Co-precipitation method 1 C,D 4 3,4
37. Metal nanocrystals by reduction 1 C,D 4 3,4
38. Sol-gel synthesis of nanoparticles 1 C,D 4 3,4
39. Microemulsions or reverse micelles, micelle formation 1 C,D 4 3,4
40. Chemical reduction, emulsions route of synthesis 1 C,D 4 3,4
41. Dendrimers and solvothermal synthesis 1 C,D 4 3,4
42.
Thermolysis routes, microwave heating synthesis-
sonochemical synthesis- electrochemical synthesis
photochemical synthesis
1 C,D 4 3,4
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Text Books/Reference Book/Other Reading Material
1 C. Brechignac, P. Houdy, M. Lahmani, “Nanomaterials and Nanochemistry”, Springer publication , 2007
2 Kenneth J. Klabunde, “Nanoscale materials in chemistry”, Wiley Interscience Publications ,2001
3 C. N. Rao, A. Muller, A. K. Cheetham , “Nanomaterials chemistry”, Wiley-VCH ,2007
4 G.B.Sergeev, “Nanochemistry”,Elseiver publication,2006
5 Guozhong Cao, Ying Wang, “Nanostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties, and
Applications”, World Scientific, 2011
6 William D.Callister , “Material Science and Engineering”, John Wiley&Sons, 2007
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
7 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT202L Nanoscale Chemistry Laboratory L T P C
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: 15NT202
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanoscience
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To gain knowledge about the practices and chemical aspects of nanotechnology
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1 Comprehend the fundamentals of wet chemical synthesis a
2 Device protocols for electrochemical estimation of stability and
corrosion study b k
3 Synthesize various nanocarriers for specific application k
Sl. No. Description of experiments Contact
hours
C-D-I-O IOs Reference
1. Synthesis of gold nanoparticles 3 D,I,O 1-3 1,2,3,4
2. Synthesis of photocatalytic solution 3 D,I,O 1-3 1,2,3,4
3. Cryochemical synthesis of metal nanoparticle. 3 D,I,O 1-3 1,2,3,4
4. Synthesis of zinc sulfide quantum dot 3 D,I,O 1-3 1,2,3,4
5. Synthesis of magnetic nanoparticles 3 D,I,O 1-3 1,2,3
6. Synthesis of nanoparticles loaded polymer fibers 3 D,I,O 1-3 1,2,3
7. Synthesis of micelles and inverse micelles 3 D,I,O 1-3 1,2,3
8. Synthesis of silica nanospheres 3 D,I,O 1-3 1,2,3
9. Green synthesis of nanoparticles using plant extract 3 D,I,O 1-3 3-6
10. Fabrication of polymer membrane using phase inversion technique 3 D,I,O 1-3 4,5,6
Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. References
1. Nanoscale chemistry laboratory course manual, 2016
2. Kenneth J. Klabunde ,“Nanoscale Materials in Chemistry”, Wiley Interscience publications,2001
3. Vincenzo Turco Liveri “Controlled Synthesis of Nanoparticles in Microheterogeneous
Systems”,Springer,2006
4. http://chemistry.beloit.edu/classes/Chem150/index.html
5. http://bioresourcesbioprocessing.springeropen.com/articles/10.1186/s40643-014-0003-y
6. L.H. Sperling, "Introduction to Physical Polymer Science", Wiley Inter science, 2006
Course nature Practical
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester
Assessment
tool Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Voce
Model
examination Total
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%
8 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT203J Micro/Nanoscale Imaging and Analysis L T P C
3 0 2 4
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanomaterials
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
Microscopy to Nanoscopy explores the world of imaging techniques from micron scale to nanoscale.
Understanding basic concepts and working of these techniques will be helpful to manipulate and
create new properties of the materials
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the various imaging techniques related to the field
of nanotechnology a k
2. Get familiarized with the science at nanoscale a b
3. Gain in-depth understanding of SPMs and electron
microcopies for applications in the field of nanotechnology a b k
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Optical Microscopic Techniques 9
1. Introduction to optical microscopy 1 C 1-3 2
2. Numerical aperture, image resolution, diffraction limit 1 C, D 1-3 2
3. Bright field microscopy- oil immersion microscopy 1 C 1-3 2
4. Kohler illumination - dark field microscope 1 C 1-3 2
5. Differential interference contrast microscopy 1 C 1-3 2
6. Polarizing microscopy - confocal microscopy 1 C 1-3 2
7. Phase contrast microscopy - fluorescence microscopy 1 C 1-3 2
8. Breaking the diffraction limit-I 1 C 1-3 2
9. Breaking the diffraction limit-II 1 C 1-3 2
Unit II - Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) 9
10. Electron optics; imaging with electrons magnetic and
electrostatic lenses, electron sources 1 C 1-3 1,4
11. SEM imaging system 1 C 1-3 1,4
12. Principle of SEM 1 C 1-3 1,4
13. Secondary and backscattered electron images 1 C 1-3 1,4
14. Specimen preparation for SEM, SEM operating conditions 1 C 1-3 1,4
15. Elemental imaging using EDS 1 C 1-3 1,4
16. Field emission SEM 1 C 1-3 1,4
17. Environmental SEM 1 C 1-3 1,4
18. Time resolved microscopy 1 C 1-3 1,4
Unit III - Transmission Electron Microscopy(TEM) 8
19. TEM imaging system; the instruments 1 C 1-3 1,4
20. Specimen preparation for TEM 1 C 1-3 1,4
21. Kinematics of scattering by nucleus, electron – electron
scattering 1 C 1-3 1,4
22. Scattering contrast for amorphous specimen - diffraction
contrast 1 C 1-3 1,4
23. Diffraction modes - single crystalline and poly-crystalline 1 C 1-3 1,4
24. Dark field images - phase control, interpretation of high
resolution images 1 C 1-3 1,4
25. Ultrahigh resolution TEM - dynamic TEM 1 C 1-3 1,4
26. z-contrast imaging, coherent and incoherent imaging, selected
area electron diffraction 1 C 1-3 1,4
Unit IV - Scanning Probe Microscopy 8
27. Instrumentation 1 C 1-3 1,3
9 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
28. Surface preparation, tip preparation 1 C 1-3 1,3
29. Cantilever dynamics 1 C,D 1-3 1,3
30. Cantilever fabrication and deflection measurements 1 C 1-3 1,3
31. Contact AFM, non-contact AFM 1 C 1-3 1,3
32. Dynamic contact AFM, taping AFM 1 C 1-3 1,3
33. Force due to electron transition, manipulation of atoms 1 C 1-3 1,3
34. Scanning thermal microscopy (SThM) and other advanced
SPM Techniques 1 C 1-3 1,3
Unit V- Electron Holographic and Tomographic
Techniques 8
35. Image plane of axis holography using the electron biprism 1 C 1-3 1,4
36. Properties of the reconstructed wave 1 C 1-3 1,4
37. Holographic investigations 1 C 1-3 1,4
38. Tomography 1 C 1-3 1,4
39. History and background – electron tomography 1 C 1-3 1,4
40. Missing wedge and imaging modes 1 C 1-3 1,4
41. STEM tomography and applications 1 C 1-3 1,4
42. Hollow cone DF tomography, Diffraction contrast tomography 1 C 1-3 1,4
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Sl. No. Description of Experiments Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
1. Determination of microstructures size using optical
microscope 2 I,O 1-3 2,5
2. Morphological study of nano-structured material using
scanning electron microscope (SEM). 2 I,O 1-3 1,4,5
3. Compositional imaging of nano materials using EDS 2 I,O 1-3 1,4,5
4. Sample preparation for TEM 2 I,O 1-3 1,4.5
5. Selected area electron diffraction (SAED) pattern analysis 2 I,O 1-3 1,4,5
6. Tunneling measurements using scanning tunneling
microscope (STM) 2 I,O 1-3 1,3,5
7. Study of surface morphology using scanning tunneling
microscope (STM) 2 I,O 1-3 1,3,5
8. Nanoparticle size determination using atomic force
microcopy (AFM) 2 I,O 1-3 1,3,5
9. Surface roughness determination using atomic force
microscopy (AFM) 2 I,O 1-3 1,3,5
Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 30
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books, Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1. Gustaaf V. Tendeloo, Dirkan Dyck, Stephen J. Pennycook, “Handbook of Nanoscopy” Wiley publication,
2012
2. Guy Cox, “Optical imaging techniques in cell biology”, CRC press, 2012
3. Bharat Bhusan, “Scanning probe microscopy in Nano-science and Nanotechnology” Springer, 2013
4. Ray, and F. Egerton, “Physical principles of electron microscopy” Springer, 2005
5. Micro/Nanoscale imaging and analysis laboratory course material, 2016
10 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Course nature Theory + Practical
Assessment Method – Theory Component (Weightage 50%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
Assessment Method – Practical Component (Weightage 50%)
In-semester Assessment tool Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Voce Model examination Total
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%
11 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT204 Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics for
Nanosystems
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanoscience
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To provide a basic knowledge of the principles and formulations of statistical and thermodynamic
principles for Small systems and to lay emphasis on the fundamentals.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Acquire knowledge in the basic concepts of statistical mechanics
and thermodynamics for nanosystems a
2. Apply the principles of thermodynamics and statistical mechanics
in new formulations a e
3. Interpret a given problem related to a nano system based on the
comprehension of the basic principles a e
4. Emphasize the significance non-equilibrium thermodynamics for
nanosystems a
5. Apply of thermodynamic principles in nanosystems of various
dimensions a
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Basic Principles and Laws of Thermodynamics 9
1. Properties of a system - control volume, surrounding –
boundaries – universe 1 C 1-2 1
2. Types of systems -concept of continuum 1 C 1 1
3. Thermodynamic equilibrium – state - temperature and zeroth
law of thermodynamics 1 C 1 2
4. Energy transfer by heat and work - first law of
thermodynamics 1 C 2 1,3,4,6
5. Second law of thermodynamics - reversible and irreversible
processes 1 C 2 2
6. Third law of thermodynamics 1 C 2 2
7. Maxwell - Boltzmann distribution 1 C 1 1,3,4,6
8. Bose-Einstein statistics - the Bose-Einstein gas - Bose-
Einstein condensation 1 C 2 1
9. Fermi-Dirac statistics - the electron gas 1 C 1 1
Unit II: Properties of Pure Substances and Phase
Equilibria 9
10. Pure substance - phases of a pure substance - ideal gas
equation of a state 1 C 2 1,3
11. Property diagrams for phase change processes 1 C 2 1
12. Deviation from ideal gas behavior – van der Waal’s equation
of state 1 C 2 1
13. Criterion for chemical equilibrium - chemical equilibrium for
simultaneous reactions 1 C 2 1,3
14. Variation of Kp with temperature 1 C 2 1
15. Phase equilibria and potential phase diagrams-projected and
mixed phase diagrams 1 C 2 1
16. Phase transitions in nanoparticles 1 C 2 1,3
17. Quasi chemical description of solid nanoparticles 1 C 2 1
12 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
18. Size dependent interface energy 1 C 1, 2 1
Unit III: Statistical Mechanics for Nano Systems 8
19. Foundations of statistical mechanics 1 C 1 1
20. Specification of states of a system - the microstate and the
macrostate 1 C 2 1
21. Contact between statistics and thermodynamics 1 C 1 2,5,7
22. The free energy, classical ideal gas 1 C 3 2,5,7,1
23. Entropy of mixing and Gibb’s paradox 1 C 1 2
24. The semi-classical perfect gas 1 C 1 2
25. Ensembles, microcannonical ensemble 1 C 2 2
26. The Gibbs Equation for nanosystems - Statistical mechanics
and thermodynamic property predictions 1 C 3 2,5,7
Unit IV: Nanothermodynamics 8
27. Nanothermodynamics –fundamental concepts-
thermodynamics and nanothermodynamics -background -the
nano perspective
1 C 3 6-7
28. Comparison with classical equilibrium thermodynamics -
extensive and intensive properties and state functions 1 C 4 6-7
29. Fundamental equations of thermodynamics - equilibrium
constant and reaction kinetics 1 C 4 6-7
30. Hill’s Theory-Tsallis’ generalization of ordinary Boltzmann–
Gibbs thermostatistics 1 C 3 6-7
31. Thermodynamics of metastable phase nucleation on
nanoscale 1 C 4 6-7
32. Classical nucleation thermodynamics-application of Laplace–
Young equation for the stability of nanophases 1 C 4 6-7
33. Thermodynamic descriptions of diamond nucleation in the
unstable phase regions of the structural state 1 C 3 6-7
34. CVD diamond - Cubic boron nitride nucleation in the
unstable regions of the structural state 1 C 4 6-7
Unit V: Non-Equilibrium Thermodynamics 8
35. Nonequilibrium thermodynamics 1 C 5 6-7
36. The concept of pseudoequilibrium 1 C 5 6-7
37. Cellular and subcellular systems 1 C 5 6-7
38. Application of classical thermodynamics to nanomaterials 1 C 4 6-7
39. Modern nanothermodynamics 1 C 5 6-7
40. Nonextensivity and nonintensivity 1 C 5 6-7
41. Non-equilibrium nanosystems-basic concepts 1 C 4 6-7
42. Friction in carbon nanotubes- DNA replication 1 C 5 6-7
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books/ Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1. Richard E.Sonntag, Gordon J.VanWylen, ‘‘Introduction to Thermodynamics, Classical and Statistical”,
Wiley Publishing, 2010.
2. Claudine Herman, “Statistical Physics’’, Springer, New York, 2005
3. Yunus .A.Cengel, Michael Boles, “Thermodynamics-An Engineering Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 2008
4. Keith Stowe, “An Introduction to Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics’’, Cambridge University, New
York, 2007
5. Günter Radons, Benno Rumpf, and Heinz Georg Schuster, “Nonlinear Dynamics of Nanosystems’’,WILEY-
Weinheim,2010
13 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
45. http://www.nanoscienceworks.org/publications/books/4/9781420048056/ITNS-STUDYGUIDE-Chap8-
Nanothermodynamics.pdf
46. C.X. Wang, G.W. Yang, Thermodynamics of metastable phase nucleation at the nanoscale, Materials
Science and Engineering, Materials Science and Engineering: R: Reports, 49,157‐202, 2005
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
14 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT205 Quantum Mechanics for Nanotechnologists L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanoscience
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To provide a working knowledge of the foundations, techniques, and key results of quantum mechanics
for solving problems in nanotechnology.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Explain the origin of old and new Quantum Mechanics a
2. Explain the bound and scattering state and can solve the numerical a e
3. Correlate quantum physics behind applications - Nano Dimension a
4. Solve the many body problems using various assumptions a e
5. Start the core subjects of Nanotechnology based on Quantum Phenomena a
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Basic Formulation & Bound State Problems 9
1. Old quantum mechanics 1 C 1 1,2,3
2. Heisenberg uncertainty principle, Ehrenfest theorem 1 C 1 1,2,3
3. Statistical interpretation and normalization of wave function 1 C 1 1,2,3
4. Hermitian operator, commutation 1 C 1 1,2,3
5. Schrödinger’s time dependent and time independent wave equations 1 C 1 1,2,3
6. Stationary states 1 C 1 1,2,3
7. Infinite square well in one and three dimensions 1 C 1 1,2,3
8. Delta function potential 1 C 1 1,2,3
9. Finite square well 1 C 1 1,2,3
Unit II: Scattering States & Quantum Tunneling 9
10. Scattering states 1 C 2 1,2,3
11. Reflection and transmission of particles 1 C 2 1,2,3
12. Delta function potential well 1 C 2,3 1,2,3
13. Rectangular potential barrier (E<V0) 1 C 2,3 1,2,3,4
14. Rectangular potential barrier (E>V0) 1 C 2,3 1,2,3,4
15. Alpha-particle emission 1 C 2,3 1,2,3,4
16. Tunneling effect 1 C 2,3 1,2,3,4
17. Double delta function potential barriers 1 C 2,3 1,2,3,4
18. Resonant tunneling 1 C 2,3 1,2,3,4
Unit III: Discrete Eigenvalue Problems 8
19. Energy Eigen functions and Eigen values coordinates precession. 1 C 3 1,2,3,4
20. Spherical Harmonic oscillator in one dimension 1 C 3 1,2,3,4
21. Momentum, Eigen values 1 C 3 1,2,3,4,5
22. Schrödinger equation in spherical coordinates 1 C 3,4 1,2,3,4,5
23. Angular equation, radial equation 1 C 3,4 1,2,3,4,5
24. Infinite spherical well, ground state properties of hydrogen atom 1 C 3,4 1,2,3,4,5
25. Angular momentum (Lx,Ly,Lz) 1 C 3,4 1,2,3,4,5
26. Generalized angular momentum (Jx,Jy,Jz), Eigen values, Spin 1/2 1 C 3,4 1,2,3,4,5
Unit IV: Approximation Methods 8
27. Principle of variational method 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5
28. Proof of variational method and implementation 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5
29. Energy Eigen value in case of time independent perturbation theory
for non-degenerate energy levels 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5
30. Eigen function in case of time independent perturbation theory for
non-degenerate energy levels 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5
31. Energy Eigen value in case of time independent perturbation theory 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5
15 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
for degenerate energy levels
32. Eigen function in case of time dependent perturbation theory for two-
level systems 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5
33. Sinusoidal perturbations 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5
34. Incoherent perturbation, Transition rate , Adiabatic and Sudden
approximations (Elementary concepts) 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5
Unit V: Identical Particles and Scattering Theory 8
35. Two particle system’s Schrödinger equation 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5
36. Transformation to center of mass frame from laboratory frame 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5
37. Exchange operator 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5
38. Symmetrization of wave function 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5
39. Bosons and Fermions 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5
40. Exchange forces, solids, free electron gas 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5
41. Band structure, quantum scattering theory 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5
42. Differential and total cross sections, Green’s functions , Born
approximation, application to spherically symmetric potentials 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. Text Books
1. David J. Griffiths, “Introduction to Quantum Mechanics”, Second Edition, Pearson, 2009
2. Ajoy Ghatak and S. Lokanathan, “Quantum Mechanics”, Fifth Edition, Macmillan, 2009
3. Reference Books/Other Reading Material
4. Bransden B.H., and Joachain C.J., “Quantum Mechanics”, Second Edition, Pearson, 2007
5. YoavPeleg, Reuven Pnini, Elyahu Zaarur, and Eugene Hecht, “Schaum’s Outline of Quantum Mechanics”,
Second Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010
6. Mathews P.M. and Venkatesan K.,“Quantum Mechanics”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
16 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT206 Biological Principles for Nanoscale Science and
Engineering
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanobiotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To learn the fundamental biological principles and concepts essential to nanotechnology so that
students are capable of taking more advanced courses in the field of nanobiotechnology
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Get familiarized with the chemistry of biological molecules a d
2. Gain knowledge on biological membranes and its energetics a
3. Introduce biophysical principles and dynamics involved in biological
systems b
4. Acquire knowledge on basic techniques involved in the study of
biological systems, biotechnology and culturing techniques d
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Introductory Biological Chemistry 9
1. Carbohydrates: classification, configurations and conformations 1 C 1 1,2,3
2. Sugar derivatives, structural and storage polysaccharides 1 C 1 1,2,3
3. Amino acids: general properties, peptide bonds 1 C 1 1,2,3
4. Essential and non-essential amino acids 1 C 1 1,2,3
5. Lipids: classification, properties of lipid aggregates 1 C 1 1,2,3
6. Biological significance of lipids 1 C 1 1,2,3
7. Nucleic acid: chemical structure and base composition 1 C 1 1,2,3
8. Double helical structures, Tm, supercoiled DNA 1 C 1 1,2,3
9. Vitamins, water and fat soluble vitamins, deficiency and diseases 1 C 1 1,2,3
Unit II: Biomembranes and its Energetics 9
10. Biological membranes 1 C 2 1,4
11. Models of membrane structure 1 C 2 1,4
12. Erythrocyte membrane, plant cell membrane, bacterial cell wall 1 C 2 1,4
13. Membrane lipids, proteins and carbohydrates 1 C 2 1,4
14. Membrane proteins 1 C 2 1,4
15. Thermodynamics of transport 1 C 2 1,4
16. Kinetics of transport 1 C 2 1,4
17. Mechanism of transport, active and passive transport 1 C 2 1,4
18. ATP-driven active transport, Ion gradient driven active transport 1 C 2 1,4
Unit III: Biophysics 8
19. Water: structure and interactions, water as solvent, proton mobility 1 C 3 1,5
20. Acid-base reactions, pH and buffers, isoelectric pH 1 C 3 1,5
21. Conformational analysis of proteins 1 C 3 1,5
22. Polypeptide chain geometrics - forces that determine protein
structure 1 C 3 1,5
23. Dynamics of biomolecules: diffusion, laws of diffusion 1 C 3 1,5
24. Active transport, facilitated diffusion 1 C 3 1,5
25. Osmosis, osmotic pressure, osmoregulation 1 C 3 1,5
26. Viscosity and biological importance- Surface tension, factors
influencing surface tension 1 C 3 1,5
Unit IV: Basic Techniques for the Study of Biological
Structure 8
27. Centrifugation: principles and application 1 C 4 1
28. Sedimentation coefficient, differential, density gradient 1 C 4 1
17 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
29. Ultra-centrifugation 1 C 4 1
30. Chromatography: ion exchange, partition, gel filtration 1 C 4 1
31. Affinity chromatography: principles and applications 1 C 4 1
32. Electrophoresis: principle, isoelectric focusing 1 C 4 1
33. Types of electrophoresis (polyacrylamide and agarose gel
electrophoresis), applications 1 C 4 1
34. Tracer technique: applications of radioisotopes in biotechnology,
Autoradiography 1 C,D 4 1
Unit V: Animal and Plant Biotechnology 8
35. Plant tissue culture techniques , in vitro pollination and
fertilization 1 C,D 4 1,6,7
36. Introduction to protoplast isolation, culture and regeneration 1 C 4 1,6,7
37. Development of transgenic plants 1 C,D 4 1,6,7
38. Single cell protein (SCP) 1 C 4 1,6,7
39. Basic techniques in animal cell culture and organ culture 1 C,D 4 1,6,7
40. Cell line and isolation of cell line - culture media 1 C,D 4 1,6,7
41. Contaminations and their laboratory management 1 C,D 4 1,6,7
42. Cell fusion, cell differentiation and growth of cultured cells,
Bioreactors for large scale culture of cells 1 C 4 1,6,7
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1. H.K Das, “Text Book of Biotechnology” Wiley India(P) Ltd, 2008
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
2. Nelson, David L. Cox, Michael M. Lehninger, Albert L, “Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry” W H
Freeman & Co, 2012
3. Donald Voet, Judith G. Voet, “Biochemistry” Wiley, 2003
4. Geoffrey M.Cooper“The Cell: A molecular approach” ASM Press, 2004
5. Charles R. Cantor, Paul Reinhard Schimmel “Biophysical Chemistry- Techniques for the Study of Biological
Structure and Function”, W. H. Freeman, 1980
6. Adrian Slater, Nigel W. Scott and Mark R. Fowler “Plant Biotechnology-The genetic manipulation of plants”
Oxford university press, 2008
7. P. Ramadass, “Animal biotechnology”, MJP Publishers, 2013
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
18 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT207 Design, Synthesis and Characterisation of Nanoscale
Materials
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15NT202
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanomaterials
Course designed by Department of Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
To explore key concepts in nanosynthesis and material characterization and to explore different
strategies for synthesizing low-dimensional nanomaterials (e.g., nanocrystals, nanotubes, nanowires)
and common techniques for nanoscale materials characterization.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Gain knowledge of the various process techniques to synthesis
nanostructured materials a
2. Understand the factors controlling growth of the nanomaterials e
3. Analyze structural and optical properties of nano structured materials d
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Zero Dimensional Nanostructures (Quantum Dots) and
Nanoparticles 9
1. Introduction to bulk and nanomaterials 1 C 1-3 1,2,3
2. Nanoparticles through homogeneous nucleation growth,
kinetically confined synthesis of nanoparticles 1 C,D 1 1,2,3
3. Classification of nanoparticle synthesis techniques: solid-state
synthesis of nanoparticles , QD synthesis 1 C 1 1,2,3
4. Mechanical alloying and mechanical milling 1 C,D 1 1,2,3
5. Vapor-phase synthesis of nanoparticles, inert gas condensation of
nanoparticles 1 C 1 1,2,3
6. Plasma-based , flame-based synthesis of particles 1 C 1 1,2,3
7. Spray pyrolysis based synthesis of nanoparticles 1 C 1 1,2,3
8. Solution processing of nanoparticles: sol-gel processing, solution
precipitation 1 C,D 1,2 1,2,3
9. Water–oil microemulsion (reverse micelle) method commercial
production and use of nanoparticles 1 C,D 1,2 1,2,3
Unit II: One-Dimensional Nanostructures: Nanowires and
Nanorods 9
10. 1 Dimensional nanostructures: introduction 1 C 2 1,2
11. Spontaneous growth - evaporation (dissolution) condensation
growth 1 C 2 1,2
12. Fundamentals of evaporation (dissolution) condensation growth 1 C 2 1,2
13. Evaporation-condensation growth mechanism 1 C,D 2 1,2
14. Dissolution-condensation growth, fundamental aspects of (vapour-
liquid-solid)VLS and (solid-liquid-solid) SLS growth 1 C,D 2 1,2
15. VLS growth of nanowires and nanocrystals 1 C,D 2 1,2
16. Control of the size of the nanowires 1 C,D 2 1,2
17. Precursors and catalysts – SLS growth 1 C,D 2 1,2
18. Stress induced recrystalization. template based synthesis 1 C,D 2 1,2
Unit III: Two-Dimensional Nanostructures: Thin Films and
Special Nanomaterials 8
19. Fundamentals of film growth 1 C 2,3 1,2,3
20. Physical vapor deposition (PVD) 1 C 2,3 1,2,3
21. Chemcialvapour deposition (CVD) 1 C 2,3 1,2,3
22. Atomic layer deposition (ALD) , self-assembly 1 C,D 2,3 1,2,3
23. LB technique - electrochemical deposition 1 C 2,3 1,2,3
19 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
24. Sol-Gel Films; spin coating and dip coating 1 C,D 2,3 1,2,3
25. Electrochemcial deposition and electrophoretic deposition 1 C 2,3 2,3
26. Micro and mesoporous material and core shell structure-
Nanocomposites and nanograined materials 1 C,D 2,3 2,3
Unit IV: - Green and Biological Methods of Synthesis 8
27. Introduction to biological methods of synthesizing nanomaterials 1 C 1,2 1,6
28. Use of bacteria, fungi(nanoparticle synthesis) 1 C 1,2 1,6
29. Actinomycetes for nanoparticle synthesis 1 C 1,2 1,6
30. Magnetotactic bacteria for natural synthesis of magnetic
nanoparticles 1 C 1,2 6
31. Mechanism of formation 1 C 1,2 6
32. Viruses as components (for synthesis) 1 C 1,2 6
33. Formation of nanostructured materials using viruses 1 C 1,2 6
34. Synthesis process and application, Green synthesis of
nanoparticles using plant extracts 1 C,D 1,2 6
Unit V: Characterization Techniques 8
35. X-ray methods: introduction 1 C 3 2,4
36. Production of X-rays & X-ray spectra, instrument units 1 C 3 2,4
37. X-ray detectors, X-ray fluorescence method 1 C 3 2,4
38. Energy dispersive analysis of X-rays 1 C,D 3 2,4
39. Infrared (IR) spectroscopy and applications 1 C,D 3 2,4,5
40. UV –Vis spectroscopy: principle and applications 1 C,D 3 2,4,5
41. Principle and instrumentation of thermogravimetry, differential
thermal analysis 1 C,D 3 2,4
42. Differential scanning calorimetry – principle importance of thermal
analysis for nanostructures 1 C,D 3 2,4
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Textbooks/Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1 Guozhong Cao, “Nanostructures and Nanomaterials, synthesis, properties and applications”, Imperial
College Press, 2004
2 C. N. Rao, A. Muller, A. K. Cheetham “The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and
Applications”, Wiley, 2004
3 Michael Wilson, Kamali Kannangara and Geoff Smith “NANOTECHNOLOGY - Basic Science and
Emerging Technologies”, A CRC Press Company, D.C, 2002
4 Douglas A. Skoog, James Holler, “Principles of Instrumental analysis”,Sauders college publication, CBS
publishers and distributors1998
5 Valeri P. Tolstoy, “Hand book of Infrared spectroscopy of ultra thinfilms”,John Wiley& Sons publication,
2003
6 C.A. Mirkin and C.M. Niemeyer, “Nanobiotechnology- II, More Concepts and Applications”, WILEY-
VCH, VerlagGmbH&Co, 2007
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
20 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT207L Design, Synthesis and Characterization of
Nanoscale Materials Laboratory
L T P C
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: 15NT207
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanomaterials
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To instruct the fundamental principles of Synthesis and Characterization Techniques
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the various process techniques available of nanostructure
materials a d
2. Enhance the various analytical technique to understand the nano
properties and characteristics of nanomaterials e k
Sl. No. Description of experiments Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
1.
Synthesis of iron oxide nanoparticle by gel combustion
technique and to determine the crystallite size using X- Ray
diffraction Techniques
3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3
2. Thin film preparation by spin coating technique and to find
dislocation density and strain of given sample by XRD methods 3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3
3.
Synthesis of nickel metal nanoparticle by hydrothermal
technique and to determine particle size using UV-Vis
spectrometer.
3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3
4.
Synthesis of zinc oxide semiconducting nanoparticle by co
precipitation technique and to calculate the absorption
coefficient & optical bandgap using UV-Vis spectrometer.
3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3
5.
Synthesis of aqueous ferrofluid by wet chemical methods and
peak analysis of IR Transmission spectrum using FTIR
spectroscopy
3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3
6. Element identification by using XRF analysis 3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3
7. Preparation of nanoparticles by using ball milling and determine
the particle size using X- Ray diffraction Techniques 3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3
8.
Preparation of nanoparticles using sonochemical reactor and
determine the dislocation density and Strain of given sample by
XRD methods
3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3
9. Dip coating and to calculate the absorption coefficient & optical
bandgap using UV-Vis spectrometer 3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3
Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. References
1 Design, synthesis and characterization of nanomaterials laboratory course manual, 2016
2 A S Edelstein and R C Cammarata, “Nanomaterials: synthesis, Properties and Applications”, Taylor and
Francis, 2012
3 Douglas A. Skoog, F. James Holler, “Principles of Instrumental analysis”,Sauders college publication,
CBS publishers, 1998
Course nature Practical
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Voce Model examination Total
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%
21 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT301 Nanophotonics L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanoscience
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose The objective is to make the learners understand the concepts of Nanophotonics.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the fundamentals of light interaction at nanoscale a e
2. Learn the basic concepts of quantum confined materials a e
3. Improve their knowledge of plasmonics and near field optics a e
4. Familiarize themselves with nanophotonic fabrication a e
5. Understand the various aspects of biophotonics a e
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I - Basics for Nanophotonics 9
1. Photons and electrons, similarities and differences 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
2. Free space propagation - Confinement of photons and electrons 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
3. Propagation through a classically forbidden zone 1 C 1 1,2,3
4. Tunneling Localization under a periodic potential 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
5. Band gap and cooperative effects for photons and electrons 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
6. Nanoscale optical interactions, axial and lateral nanoscopic
localization 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
7. Nanoscale confinement of electronic interactions 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
8. Quantum confinement effects and nanoscale interaction dynamics 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
9. Nanoscale electronic energy transfer and Cooperative emissions 1 C 1 1-5
Unit II - Quantum Confined Materials and Photonic Crystals 9
10. Quantum confined materials: Inorganic quantum confined
structures 1 C 2 1,2,3
11. Manifestation of quantum confinement and quantum confined
stark effect 1 C 2 1,2,3
12. Dielectric confinement effect and super lattices 1 C 2 1,2,3
13. Core-shell quantum dots and quantum wells 1 C 2 1,2,3
14. Quantum confined structures as lasing media and organic quantum
confined structures. 1 C 2 1,2,3
15. Photonic crystals: Important features of photonic crystals 1 C 2 1,2,3
16. Dielectric mirrors and interference filters 1 C 2 1,2,3
17. Photonic crystal laser and photonic crystal fibers (PCFs) 1 C 2 1,2,3
18. Photonic crystal sensing 1 C 2 1,2,3
Unit III - Plasmonics and Near Field Optics 8
19. Plasmonics: Internal reflection and evanescent waves 1 C 3 1,2,3
20. Plasmons and surface plasmon resonance, attenuated total
reflection 1 C 3 1,2,3
21. Grating SPR coupling and optical waveguide SPR coupling 1 C 3 1,2,3
22. SPR dependencies and materials, plasmonics and nanoparticles 1 C 3 1,2,3
23. Near Field Optics: Aperture less near field optics 1 C 3 1,2,3
24. Near field scanning optical microscopy (NSOM or SNOM) 1 C 3 1,2,3
25. SNOM based detection of plasmonic energy transport 1 C 3 1,2,3
26. SNOM based visualization of waveguide structures, SNOM based
optical data storage and recovery 1 C 3 1,2,3
Unit IV - Nanophotonic Fabrication 8
27. Adiabatic nanofabrication 1 C,D 4 1,2,3
28. Non adiabatic nanofabrications: near field optical CVD 1 C,D 4 1,2,3
22 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
29. Near field photolithography 1 C,D 4 1,2,3
30. Self-assembling method via optical near field interactions 1 C,D 4 1,2,3
31. Regulating the size of nanoparticles using size dependent
resonance 1 C,D 4 1,2,3
32. Regulating the position of nanoparticles using size dependent
resonance 1 C,D 4 1,2,3
33. Size controlled alignment of nanoparticles 1 C,D 4 1,2,3
34. Position controlled alignment of nanoparticles, Separation
controlled alignment of nanoparticles 1 C,D 4 1,2,3
Unit V – Nanobiophotonics 8
35. The cell, scale and constituents 1 C 5 1-5
36. Origin and optical contrast mechanisms 1 C 5 1-5
37. Classical contrast mechanisms: bright field and dark field contrast 1 C 5 1-5
38. Phase contrast and inter ferrometric contrast 1 C 5 1-5
39. Fluorescence contrast mechanism 1 C 5 1-5
40. Nonlinear microscopy based on second harmonic generation and
coherent antistokes 1 C 5 1-5
41. Raman scattering 1 C 5 1-5
42.
Reduction of the observation volume – far field methods, 4Pi
microscopy, microscopy on a mirror and stimulated emission
depletion
1 C 5 1-5
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1. M.Ohtsu,K.Kobayashi,T.Kawazoe and T.Yatsui, “Principals of Nanophotonics (Optics and
Optoelectronics)”,CRC press,2003
2. H.Masuhara,S Kawata and F Tokunga, “NanoBiophotoics”, Elsevier Science, 2007
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
3. BEA Saleh and AC Teich, “Fundamentals of Photonics”, John Wiley and Sons,1993
4. P.N.Prasad, “Introduction to Biophotonics”, John Wiley and Sons, 2003
5. Zhao, Yong Sheng (Ed.), “Organic Nanophotonics - Fundamentals and Applications”, Springer-Verlag Berlin
Heidelberg, 2015
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
23 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT302 Nanotoxicology and Nanotechnology Engineering Practice L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanobiotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose The purpose of this course is to evaluate nanomaterial safety for various applications, its impact on
environment and also to determine the real or perceived risks of using nanomaterials.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Acquire and create awareness on the toxicity of nanomaterials c
2. Understand the protocols involved in testing toxicity of nanomaterials f
3. Discuss the adverse effect of nanoparticles in biological systems a
4. Produce nanomaterials and products without harming the environment
or human health h
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Toxicity of Nanomaterials 9
1. Introduction to toxicology 1 C 1 1,2
2. Size-specific behavior of nanomaterials 1 C 1,2 1,2
3. Nanotoxicology challenges 1 C 1,2 1,2
4. Carbon nanotubes in practice 1 C 1,2 1,2
5. Postproduction processing of carbon nanotubes 1 C 1,2 1,2
6. Physicochemical properties of nanomaterials 1 C 1,2 1,2
7. Mediators of toxicity-physicochemical properties of
nanomaterials 1 C 1,2 1,2
8. Characterization of administered nanomaterials during
toxicity studies 1 C 1,2,3 1,2
9. Nanomaterial characterization after administration
experiment 1 C 1,2 1,2
Unit II: Nanoparticle Exposure 9
10. Physicochemical determinants in particle toxicology 1 C 2,3 1,2
11. Nanoparticles vs. micron-size particles 1 C 2,3 1,2
12. Nanoparticle toxicity comparison to larger counterparts 1 C 1,2,3 1,2
13. Requirement for appropriate model particles, 1 C 1,2,3 1,2
14. Exposure assessment, exposure pathways and their
significance 1 C 2,3 1,2
15. Documenting the occurrence and nature of exposures 1 C 2,3 1,2
16. Bio-distribution of nanoparticles 1 C 2,3 1,2
17. Localization of particles in tissues 1 C 2,3 1,2
18. Relevance of drug targeting to nanotoxicology 1 C 2,3 1,2
Unit III: Nanoparticle Interaction with Biological
Membranes 8
19. Interaction of nanoparticles with lipid bilayers 1 C 2,3 2,3,4
20. Cell-level studies of nanoparticle-induced membrane
permeability 1 C 2,3 2,3,4
21. Internalization of cation nanoparticles into cells 1 C 2,3 2,3,4
22. Placental biological barrier model for evaluation of
nanoparticle transfer 1 C 2,3 2,3,4
23. Transport across placental barrier, Assessment of placental
transfer 1 C 2,3 2,3,4
24. Biological mechanism of nanoparticle disposition 1 C 2,3 2,3,4
25. Outline of gene-cellular interactions of nanomaterials 1 C 2,3 2,3,4
24 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
26. Overview of dermal effects of nanomaterials, Toxicity of
nanoparticles in the eye 1 C 2,3 2,3,4
Unit IV: Advanced Methodologies and Techniques for
Assessing Nanomaterial Toxicity 8
27. High-content screening in nanomedicine 1 C 4 1,2
28. Enabling product translation- Nanomedicine 1 C 4 1,2
29. In-vitro high content screening assessment of nanomedicinal
products 1 C 4 1,2
30. Ex-vivo assessment of nanomedicinal products 1 C 4 1,2
31. Histopathology assessment of nanomedicinal products 1 C 4 1,2
32. Impendance high throughput screening in nanomedicine 1 C 4 1,2
33. Atomic force microscopy in nanomedicine 1 C 4 1,2
34. Nanomedicine methodology for translation, Advantages and
limitations- Nanomedicine 1 C 4 1,2
Unit V: Guidelines for Working with Engineered
Nanomaterials 8
35. Guidelines for working with engineered nanomaterials-
Introduction 1 C 1,2,3 5,6
36. Potential for Occupational Exposure 1 C 1,2,3 5,6
37. Factors Affecting Exposure to Nanomaterials 1 C 2,3 5,6
38. Elements of a Risk Management Program 1 C 2,3 5,6
39. Engineering controls 1 C 3,4 5,6
40. Dust collection efficiency of filters 1 C 3,4 5,6
41. Work practices 1 C 3,4 5,6
42. Personal protective clothing, respirators, Cleanup and
disposal of nanomaterials 1 C 2,3,4 5,6
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. Text Books
1. A. Monterio-Rivierie, C. Lang Tran, “Nanotoxicology”, Informa health care, London, 2007
2. A. Monterio-Rivierie, C. Lang Tran, “Nanotoxicology, Characterization, Dosing and Health effects”,
Informa health care, London, 2007
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
3. Yuliang Zhao, Hari Singh Nalwa, “Nanotoxicology: interactions of nanomaterials with biological
systems”, American Scientific Publishers, 2007
4. Louis Theodore “Nanotechnology Basic Calculations for Engineers and Scientists”, John Wiley and
Sons, 2006
5. Lynn Goldman, Christine Coussens, “Implications of nanotechnology for environmental health research”,
National Academic Press, Washington, 2007
6. “Approaches to safe nanotechnology: Managing the health and safety concerns associated with
engineered nanomaterials”, DHHS (NIOSH) publishers, 2009
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
25 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT303 Nanobiotechnology L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15NT206
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanobiotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
The goal of this course is to provide an insight into the fundamentals of nanotechnology in biological
and biomedical research. It will also guide the students to understand how nanomaterials can be used
for a diversity of analytical and medicinal rationales.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the essential features of biology and nanotechnology
that are converging to create the new area of bionanotechnology a h
2. Recognize the structural and functional principles of
bionanotechnology c
3. Employ bionanomaterials for analysis and sensing techniques c
4. Apprehend and explain the biomedical applications of
nanotechnology d
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Nanobiomaterials 9
1. Introduction to nanobiomaterials 1 C 1 1,3
2. Surface and bulk properties of bio materials 1 C 1 1,3
3. Nanobiomaterials, nanoceramics 1 C 1 1,3
4. Nanopolymers, nano silica 1 C 1 1,3
5. Hydroxy apatite, carbon based nanomaterials, surface
modification 1 C 1 1,3
6. Textured and porous materials 1 C 1 1,3
7. Surface immobilized biomolecules 1 C 1 1,3
8. Cell-biomaterial interactions, immune response 1 C 1 1,3
9. In vitro and in vivo assessment of tissue compatibility 1 C 1 1,3
Unit II - Structural & Functional Principles of
BionanotechnologY 9
10. Lipid bilayers, liposomes 1 C 1,2 1,2
11. Neosomes, polysaccharides 1 C 1,2 1,2
12. Peptides, nucleic acids 1 C 1,2 1,2
13. DNA scaffolds, enzymes 1 C 1,2 1,2
14. Biomolecular motors: linear, rotary mortors 1 C 1,2 1,2
15. Immunotoxins, membrane transporters and pumps 1 C 1,2 1,2
16. Antibodies- monoclonal antibodies 1 C 1,2 1,2
17. Immunoconjugates 1 C 1,2 1,2
18. Limitations of natural biomolecules 1 C 1,2 1,2
Unit III – Protein and DNA Based Nanostructures 8
19. Nanocircuitry - S-layer proteins: structure, chemistry and
assembly 1 C 1,2 1
20. lipid chips -S - Layers as Templates 1 C 1,2 1
21. Engineered nanopores 1 C 1,2 1
22. DNA–protein nanostructures 1 C 1,2 1
23. DNA-templated electronics 1 C 1,2 1
24. DNA-based metallic nanowires and networks 1 C 2,3 1
25. DNA- gold-nanoparticle conjugates 1 C 2,3 1
26. DNA - templated electronics, DNA nanostructures for
mechanics and computing 1 C 2,3 1
26 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Unit IV- Nanobio-Analytics 8
27. Nanobio-analytics-introduction 1 C 3,4 1
28. Luminescent quantum dots for biological labeling 1 C 3,4 1
29. Nanoparticle molecular labels 1 C 3,4 1
30. Surface biology: analysis of biomolecular structure by
atomic force microscopy 1 C 3,4 1
31. Analysis of biomolecular structure by molecular pulling -
force spectroscopy 1 C 3,4 1
32. Biofunctionalized nanoparticles for surface 1 C 3,4 1
33. Enhanced Raman scattering, Surface plasmon resonance 1 C 3,4 1
34. Bioconjugated silica nanoparticles for bioanalytical
applications 1 C 3,4 1
Unit V-Nanotechnology in Food, Medicine and Health
Science 8
35. Nano particle based drug delivery systems 1 C, I 2,3,4 4,1
36. Ultra sound triggered nano/microbubbles 1 C 2,3,4 4,1
37. Regenerative medicine, nanoimmuno conjugates 1 C 2,3,4 4,1
38. Biosensors - optical biosensors based on nanoplasmonics,
nanobiosesors 1 C,I 2,3,4 4,1
39. Nano-biosensors for mimicking gustatory and olfactory
senses 1 C,I 2,3,4 4,1
40. Cyclodextrin in nanomedicinal foods and cosmetics 1 C,I 2,3,4 4,1
41. Bioavailability and delivery of nutraceuticals and
functional foods using nanotechnology 1 C,I 2,3,4 4,1
42.
Polymer-based nanocomposites for food
packaging, nanocomposites for food packaging, Toxicity
and environmental risks of nanomaterials
1 C,I 2,3,4 4,1
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. Text Books
1. C. M. Niemeyer, “Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and Perspectives”, Wiley – VCH, 2006
2. David S Goodsell, “Bionanotechnology”, John Wiley & Sons, 2004
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
3. Buddy D. Ratner , Allan S. Hoffman , Frederick J. Schoen, Jack E. Lemons, “ Biomaterials Science: An
Introduction to Materials in Medicine”, Academic Press, 2012
4. Debasis Bagchi, Manashi Bagchi, Hiroyoshi Moriyama, Fereidoon Shahidi, “Bio-Nanotechnology: A
Revolution in Food, Biomedical and Health Sciences” Wiley-Blackwell, 2013
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
27 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT303L Nanobiotechnology Laboratory L T P C
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: 15NT303
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanobiotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
The goal of this course is to provide an insight into the fundamentals of nanotechnology in biological
and biomedical research. It will also guide the students to understand how nanomaterials can be used
for a diversity of analytical and medicinal rationales.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Employ bionanomaterials for analysis and sensing techniques c k
2. Apprehend and explain the biomedical applications of nanotechnology d
Sl.
No. Description of experiments
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
1. Isolation and bioconjugation DNA structure with nanoparticles 3 I,O 1,2 1-3
2. Determination of electrical conduction of DNA-nano conjugate 3 I,O 1,2 1-3
3. Detection of biomolecule by cyclic voltammetry 3 I,O 1,2 1-3
4. Estimation of analyte concentration using electrochemical sensor 3 I,O 1,2 1-3
5. Functionalization of nanoparticles for drug delivery 3 I,O 1,2 1-3
6. 2D- Electrophoresis technique for separation of proteins 3 I,O 1,2 1-3
7. Effect of nanoparticles on biomolecules 3 I,O 1,2 1-3
8. Synthesis polymeric scaffold by particulate leaching 3 I,O 1,2 1-3
9. Quantitative estimation of biomolecule- conjugated quantum dots 3 I,O 1,2 1-3
Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. References
1. Nanobiotechnology Laboratory course material, 2016
2. Andrew Collins, “Nanotechnology Cookbook: Practical, Reliable and Jargon-free Experimental
Procedures”, Elsevier, 2012
3. Challa, “Nanofabrication Towards Biomedical Applications, Techniques, Tools, Applications and Impact”,
Wiley – VCH, 2005
Course nature Practical
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Voce Model examination Total
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%
28 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Purpose To obtain an hands-on experience in converting a small novel idea / technique into a working
model / prototype involving multi-disciplinary skills and / or knowledge and working in at team.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To conceptualise a novel idea / technique into a product c
2. To think in terms of multi-disciplinary environment d
3. To understand the management techniques of implementing a
project k
4. To take on the challenges of teamwork, prepare a presentation in a
professional manner, and document all aspects of design work. g
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
An Multidisciplinary project to be taken up by a team of maximum
of ten students. Development of prototype product, a 3D model,
simulation, blueprint for a larger project and any other development
work are permitted. The contribution of the individuals in the project
should be clearly brought out. A combined report is to be submitted.
A presentation is to be made for the reviewers on the work done by
the candidate.
C,D,I 1,2,3,4
Total contact hours
Course nature Project – 100% internal continuous
assessment
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Refer the table Total
Weightage Refer the table below 100%
End semester examination Weightage : 0%
15NT375L Minor Project I L T P C
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite:
Prerequisite:
Data Book / Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
29 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Assessment components
Assessment
component Expected outcome Evaluators
Criteria or
basis Marks
Project
proposal
(Review – I)
A short presentation to be delivered on:
A brief, descriptive project title (2-4 words). This is
critical!
The 3 nearest competitors (existing solutions) and
price.
Team members name, phone number, email,
department/degree program, and year.
A description of the product opportunity that has
been identified. To include: Documentation of the
market need, shortcomings of existing competitive
products, and definition of the target market and its
size.
Proposed supervisor / guide
Panel of
reviewers
Viability /
feasibility of
the project
Extent of
preliminary
work done.
0
Review II
Mission Statement / Techniques
Concept Sketches, Design Specifications / Modules
& Techniques along with System architecture
Coding
Panel of
reviewers
Originality,
Multi-
disciplinary
component,
clarity of
idea and
presentation,
team work,
handling
Q&A.
20
Review III
Final Concept and Model / Algorithm/ Technique
Drawings, Plans / programme output
Financial Model / costing
Prototype / Coding
Final Presentation and Demonstration
Panel of
reviewers
Originality,
Multi-
disciplinary
component,
clarity of
idea and
presentation,
team work,
handling
Q&A.
50
Final
technical
Report
A good technical report Supervisor /
Guide
Regularity,
systematic
progress,
extent of
work and
quality of
work
30
Total 100
30 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Purpose To enhance the disseminating skills of the student about the current and contemporary research
work that are being carried out across the world.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To understand the research methodology adopted by various
researchers h i j
2. To mathematically model a problem, critically analyse it and
adopt strategies to solve b c e
3. To understand and present a well documented research e g
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Guidelines for conducting 15NT380L Seminar for B.Tech
1. Upon registering for the course the student must identify a sub-
domain of the degree specialization that is of interest to the
student and start collecting research papers as many as possible.
2. After collecting sufficient number of research papers the student
must peruse all the papers, meet the course faculty and discuss
on the salient aspects of each and every paper.
3. The course faculty, after discussion with the student will approve
TWO research papers that is appropriate for presentation.
4. The student must collect additional relevant reference materials
to supplement and compliment the two research papers and start
preparing the presentation.
5. Each student must present a 15-minute presentation on each of
the approved research paper to the panel of evaluators.
6. The presenter must present one research paper within the first
half of the semester (6 weeks) and another research paper in the
next half of the semester (6 weeks) as per the schedule.
7. All other students registered for the course will form the
audience.
8. The audience as well as the evaluators will probe the student
with appropriate questions and solicit response from the
presenter.
9. The presentation will be evaluated against 7 to 8 assessment
criteria by 4 to 5 evaluators.
10. The score obtained through the presentations of TWO research
papers will be converted to appropriate percentage of marks.
This course is 100% internal continuous assessment.
C,D 1,2,3,4
Total contact hours
15NT380L Seminar I L T P C
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Course nature 100% internal continuous
assessment.
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Presentation 1 Presentation 2 Total
Weightage 50% 50% 100%
End semester examination Weightage : 0%
31 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
EVALUATION OF SEMINAR PRESENTATIONS
Name of the Student: Date:
Register Number: Degree and Branch:
Topic:
Sl. No. Criteria for Assessment Evaluator 1 Evaluator 2 Evaluator 3 Evaluator 4 Evaluator 5
1 Understanding of the subject
2 Clarity of presentation
3 Appropriate use of Audio visual
aids
4 Whether cross references have
been consulted
5 Ability to respond to questions on
the subject
6 Time scheduling
7 Completeness of preparation
Overall Grades:
Remarks:
Signature of Course Coordinator
Poor 1 Below Average 2 Average 3 Good 4 Very Good 5
32 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Purpose
To offer students the opportunity to study with the world’s best universities by integrating select
MOOCs in a regular degree programme and providing students full credit transfer, as per
university regulations, if they earn a “Verified / Completion Certificate” and take a proctored
examination through a secure, physical testing center.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To apply the concepts, theories, laws, technologies learnt herein
to provide engineering solutions. f h i j
Course nature Online - 100% internal continuous
assessment.
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Quiz Assignment
Non-proctored /
Unsupervised Tests
Proctored /
Supervised Test Total
Weightage 25% 25% 10% 40% 100%
End semester examination Weightage : 0%
Registration process, Assessment and Credit Transfer:
1. Students can register for courses offered by approved global MOOCs platforms like edX, Coursera or Universities
with which SRM partners specifically for MOOCs.
2. Annually, each department must officially announce, to the students as well as to the Controller of Examinations,
the list of courses that will be recognised and accepted for credit transfer.
3. The department must also officially announce / appoint one or more faculty coordinator(s) for advising the students
attached to them, monitoring their progress and assist the department in proctoring the tests, uploading the marks /
grades, and collecting and submitting the graded certificate(s) to the CoE, within the stipulated timeframe.
4. Student who desires to pursue a course, from the above department-approved list, through MOOCs must register for
that course during the course registration process of the Faculty of Engineering and Technology, SRM University.
5. The maximum credit limits for course registration at SRM will include the MOOCs course registered.
6. The student must periodically submit the marks / grades obtained in various quizzes, assignments, tests etc
immediately to the Faculty Advisor or the Course Coordinator for uploading in the university’s academic module.
7. The student must take the final test as a Proctored / Supervised test in the university campus.
8. The student must submit the “Certificate of Completion” as well as the final overall Marks and / or Grade within the
stipulated time for effecting the grade conversion and credit transfer, as per the regulations. It is solely the
responsibility of the individual student to fulfill the above conditions to earn the credits.
9. The attendance for this course, for the purpose of awarding attendance grade, will be considered 100% , if the
credits are transferred, after satisfying the above (1) to (7) norms; else if the credits are not transferred or
transferable, the attendance will be considered as ZERO.
15NT385L Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCs) I L T P C
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
33 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Purpose To provide short-term work experience in an Industry/ Company/ Organisation
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To get an inside view of an industry and organization/company j
2. To gain valuable skills and knowledge j
3. To make professional connections and enhance networking f g
4. To get experience in a field to allow the student to make a
career transition i
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
1. It is mandatory for every student to undergo this course.
2. Every student is expected to spend a minimum of 15-days in
an Industry/ Company/ Organization, during the summer
vacation.
3. The type of industry must be NOT below the Medium Scale
category in his / her domain of the degree programme.
4. The student must submit the “Training Completion
Certificate” issued by the industry / company / Organisation as
well as a technical report not exceeding 15 pages, within the
stipulated time to be eligible for making a presentation before
the committee constituted by the department.
5. The committee will then assess the student based on the report
submitted and the presentation made.
6. Marks will be awarded out of maximum 100.
7. Appropriate grades will be assigned as per the regulations.
8. Only if a student gets a minimum of pass grade, appropriate
credit will be transferred towards the degree requirements, as
per the regulations.
9. It is solely the responsibility of the individual student to fulfill
the above conditions to earn the credits.
10. The attendance for this course, for the purpose of awarding
attendance grade, will be considered 100%, if the credits are
transferred, after satisfying the above (1) to (8) norms; else if
the credits are not transferred or transferable, the attendance
will be considered as ZERO.
11. The committee must recommend redoing the course, if it
collectively concludes, based on the assessment made from
the report and presentations submitted by the student, that
either the level of training received or the skill and / or
knowledge gained is NOT satisfactory.
D, I,O 1,2,3,4
Total contact hours
Course nature Training – 100% internal continuous
assessment
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Presentation Report Total
Weightage 80% 20% 100%
End semester examination Weightage : 0%
15NT390L Internship / Industrial Training I L T P C
0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval --- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
34 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Purpose To impart an insight into the current industrial trends and practices
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To obtain an insight into the current industrial trends and practices j
2. To obtain an insight into the technologies adopted by industries j
3. To obtain an insight into the technical problems encountered by the
industries and the scope for providing solutions. h
4. To network with industry g
Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
1. The department will identify and shortlist few emerging topics that
are trending in industry.
2. The department will identify experts from industry who are willing
to deliver modules on the shortlisted topics.
3. The identified expert will assist the department in formulating the
course content to be delivered as a 30-hour module, prepare lectures
notes, ppt, handouts and other learning materials.
4. The department will arrange to get the necessary approvals for
offering the course, from the university’s statutory academic bodies
well before the actual offering.
5. The department must officially announce, to the students as well as
to the Controller of Examinations, the list of courses that will be
offered as industry module.
6. The department must also officially announce / appoint one or more
faculty coordinator(s) for advising the students attached to them,
monitoring their progress and assist the department in
proctoring/supervising/assessment the quizzes, assignments, tests
etc, uploading the marks, attendance etc, within the stipulated
timeframe.
7. The Student who desires to pursue a course, from the above
department-approved list, must register for that course during the
course registration process of the Faculty of Engineering and
Technology, SRM University.
8. The maximum credit limits for course registration at SRM will
include the Industry Module also.
9. All academic requirements of a professional course like minimum
attendance, assessment methods, discipline etc will be applicable
for this Industry Module.
10. The course will be conducted on week ends or beyond the college
regular working hours.
C,D,I,O 1,2,3,4
Total contact hours 30
Course nature 100% internal continuous
assessment.
Assessment Method – Theory Component (Weightage 50%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage 50%
15NT490L Industry Module I L T P C
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
35 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT304 Nanoelectronics L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15NT201
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanoelectronics
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose The major goals and objectives are to provide the fundamental principles of nanoelectronics with the
present research front in applications and to be able to critically assess future trends.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the limitations of silicon electronics and progress of
nanoelectronics a e
2. Equip themselves about the significance of tunneling effect in
nanoelectronic devices a e
3. Understand the concepts of coulomb blockade and electron
transport a e
4. Improve their ability in knowing the electronic property of
materials in mesoscopic level a e
5. Achieve adequate knowledge in simulation methods a e
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Evolution of Nanoelectronics 9
1. Introduction to nanoelectronics 1 C 1 1-5
2. Moore’s law and its consequences 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
3. Silicon electronics - limitations 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
4. Discussion of the international technology roadmap
characteristics 1 C 1 1,2,3
5. Need for new concepts in electronics 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
6. Silicon MOS transistor from micro to nano 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
7. Challenges in micro to nano conversion 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
8. Nanocomputing 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
9. Future opportunities and applications 1 C 1 1,2,3,4
Unit II: Tunnel Junctions and Applications of Tunneling 9
10. Tunneling through a potential barrier 1 C,D 2 1,2,3
11. Potential energy profiles for material interfaces 1 C 2 1,2,3
12. Metal - insulator and metal - semiconductor junctions 1 C 2 1,2,3
13. Metal - insulator - metal junctions 1 C 2 1,2,3
14. Applications of tunneling 1 C 2 1,2,3
15. Field emission gate - oxide tunneling 1 C 2 1,2,3
16. Hot electron effects in MOSFETs 1 C 2 1,2,3
17. Double barrier tunneling 1 C 2 1,2,3
18. Resonant tunneling diode 1 C 2 1,2,3
Unit III: Ballistic and Spin Transport 8
19. Coulomb blockade 1 C 3 1,2,3
20. Tunnel junction excited by a current source 1 C 3 1,2,3
21. Coulomb blockade in a quantum dot circuit 1 C 3 1,2,3
22. Single electron transistor, ballistic transport 1 C 3 1,2,3
23. Electron collisions and length scales 1 C 3 1,2,3
24. Ballistic transport model 1 C 3 1,2,3
25. Quantum resistance and conductance 1 C 3 1,2,3
26. Transport of spin , spintronics devices and applications 1 C 3 1,2,3
Unit IV: Molecular Electronics 8
27. Introduction to moletronics 1 C 4 1,2,3
36 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
28. An atomistic view of electrical resistance 1 C 4 1,2,3
29. Schrodinger equation and self consistent field 1 C 4 1,2,3
30. Band Structure 1 C 4 1,2,3
31. Level broadening 1 C 4 1,2,3
32. Coherent transport 1 C 4 1,2,3
33. Non-coherent transport in molecular electronics devices 1 C 4 1,2,3
34. Molecular devices and logic switches, Interface engineering
issues 1 C,D 4 1,2,3
Unit V: Nanoelectronics Simulation 8
35. Introduction to computational methods 1 C 5 1,2,3,5,6
36. Molecular wire conductance 1 C 5 1,2,3,5,6
37. Some theoretical and computational aspects on molecular
conductance 1 C 5 1,2,3,5,6
38. Various modeling techniques 1 C 5 1,2,3,5,6
39. Monte Carlo method 1 C 5 1,2,3,5,6
40. Ab initio simulations 1 C 5 1,2,3,5,6
41. Multi scale modeling 1 C 5 1,2,3,5,6
42. Modeling of nanodevices, Applications 1 C 5 1,2,3,5,6
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1. George W. Hanson, “Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics”, Prentice Hall, 2007
2. V. Mitin, V. Kochelap, and M. Stroscio, “Introduction to Nanoelectronics”, Cambridge University Press,
2008
3. Reference Books/Other Reading Material
4. Karl Goser et.al, “Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From Transistors to Molecular and Quantum devices”,
Springer, 2005
5. Mark. A. Reed and Takhee, “Molecular Electronics”, American Scientific Publishers, 2003
6. Michael. C. Petty, “Molecular Electronics: From Principles to Practice”, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2007
7. K. I. Ramachandran et.al, “Computational Chemistry and Molecular Modeling”, Springer, 2008
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
37 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT304L NANOELECTRONICS SIMULATION LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: 15NT304
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanoelectronics
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose The main goal of this course is to make learner gain knowledge of designing and fabrication process which is
essential for simulation of nanoelectronic devices.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the basic concepts involved in nanoelectronics devices using MATLAB b k
2. Gain adequate knowledge in designing of electronics device using PSpice b k
3. Familiarize themselves with simulation process involved in nanoelectronics device b k
4. Understand the characteristics of nanoelectronics device using simulation tool b k
Sl.
No. Description of experiments
Contact
hours
C-D-I-
O IOs Reference
1. Determination of electron concentration versus temperature using MATLAB 2 D,I,O 1 1,2
2. Determination of electron (μn) and hole (μp) mobilities versus doping
concentration in semiconductor using MATLAB 2 D,I,O 1 1,2
3. Determination of Fermi function for different temperature using MATLAB 2 D,I,O 1 1,2
4. Numerical solution of the one dimensional Schrodinger wave equation of a time
independent system using MATLAB program 2 D,I,O 1 1,2
5. PSpice simulation of diode and its I-V characteristics with smoke analysis 2 D,I,O 2 1,3
6. PSpice simulation of BJT and its I-V characteristics 2 D,I,O 2 1,3
7. PSpice simulation of FET and its I-V characteristics 2 D,I,O 2 1,3
8. PSpice simulation of CMOS and its I-V characteristics 2 D,I,O 2 1,3
9. Simulation of diode using TCAD and its characterization 2 D,I,O 3,4 1,4,5
10. Designing of 2D MOSFET using TCAD 2 D,I,O 3,4 1,4,5
Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 30
Learning Resources
Sl. No. References
1. Nanoelectronics simulation laboratory course manual, 2016
2. Sarhan. M. Musa, “Computational Nanotechnology: Modeling and Applications with MATLAB”, CRC Press, 2011
3. John O. Attia, “Electronics and Circuit Analysis using Matlab”, CRC Press, 2001
4. Mitchell A. Thornton, “PSpice for Circuit Theory and Electronic Devices”,Morgan& Claypool Publishers series
5. Simon Li and Yue Fu, “3D TCAD Simulation for Semiconductor Processes, Devices and Optoelectronics”, Springer,
2012
Course nature Practical
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Voce Model examination Total
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%
38 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT305 Micro and Nanofabrication L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanofabrication
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To deal with the aspects of the technology of processing procedures involved in the fabrication of
micro and nanoelectronic devices
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Provide learners a systematic overview of micro and nano
fabrication processes a
2. Gain understanding of lithography, etching and ion implantation
methods to fabricate, structure and modify the layer a b c
3. Understand thin film fabrication techniques including PVD and
CVD and to apply the knowledge to film formation a b
4. Apply the knowledge of microfabrication technology to the fields
of general microelectronics systems b
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I : Crystal Growth, Epitaxy and Oxidation 9
1. Introduction to IC fabrication 1 C 1 1,2
2. Electronic grade silicon – crystal plane and orientation –
defects in the lattice 1 C 1,4 1,2
3. Czochralski crystal growing 1 C 1,4 1,2
4. Silicon shaping – processing consideration 1 C 1,4 1,2
5. Vapour phase epitaxy – liquid phase epitaxy 1 C 1,4 1,2
6. Selective epitaxy - molecular beam epitaxy - epitaxial
evaluation 1 C 1,4 1,2
7. Growth mechanism and kinetics 1 C,D 1,4 1,2
8. Thin oxides – oxidation techniques and systems – oxide
properties 1 C,D 1,4 1,2
9. Redistribution of dopants at interface – oxidation of
polysilicon – Oxidation induced effects 1 C 1.4 1,2
Unit II: Lithography, Wet and Dry Etching 9
10. Optical lithography 1 C,D 1,2,4 1,2
11. Mask Making 1 C,D 1,2,4 1,2
12. Electron lithography 1 C 1,2,4 1,2
13. X-ray lithography 1 C 1,2,4 1,2
14. Ion lithography – plasma properties 1 C 1,2,4 1,2
15. Feature size control and anisotropie etch mechanism 1 C 1,2.4 1,2
16. Lift off techniques 1 C,D 1,2,4 1,2
17. Plasma reactor – Fl2&Cl2 based etching 1 C 1,2,4 1,2
18. Relative plasma etching techniques and equipment 1 C 1,2,4 1,2
Unit III: Deposition, Diffusion &Ion Implantation 8
19. Deposition process 1 C 1,3,4 1,2
20. Physical vapour deposition - sputtering 1 C 1,3,4 1,2
21. Polysilicon - plasma assisted deposition 1 C 1,3,4 1,2
22. Models of diffusion in solids – Fick’s one dimensional
diffusion equation – atomic diffusion mechanism 1 C,D 1,3,4 1,2
23. Carrier recovery due to annealing 1 C 1,3,4 1,2
24. Implantation equipment – annealing -shallow junction 1 C 1,3,4 1,2
25. High energy implantation 1 C,D 1,3,4 1,2
26. Metallization applications, Metallization choices – patterning 1 C 1,3,4 1,2
39 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
– metallization problems
Unit IV: Device and Mos Circuit Fabrication 8
27. Isolation – p-n junction isolation 1 C 1-4 1-3
28. Self alignment – local oxidation 1 C 1-4 1-3
29. Trench techniques – planarization 1 C 1-4 1-3
30. Chemical- mechanical polishing – metallization and gettering 1 C 1-4 1-3
31. Basic MOS device considerations – MOS transistor Layout
and design rules 1 C,D 1-4 1-3
32. Metal - gate transistor layout – polysilicon-gate transistor
layout -channel length and width biases 1 C,D 1-4 1-3
33. CMOS technology - CMOS isolation and latch up 1 C 1-4 1-3
34. Silicon - on –Insulator devices , State-of- the art and advanced
CMOS technologies. 1 C 1-4 1-3
Unit V: Toward Molecular Nanotechnology 8
35. Directed self-assembly: device assembly 1 C 1-4 5-7
36. Electrostatic self-assembly 1 C 1-4 5-7
37. Templated self-assembly: colloids and nanoparticle 1 C 1-4 4-6
38. Templated self-assembly: block copolymers and DNA
nanostructures 1 C 1-4 4-6
39. Scanning probe lithographic techniques: local anodic
oxidation 1 C 1-4 4-6
40. Scribing 1 C 1-4 4-6
41. Atomic manipulation by SPM 1 C,D 1-4 4-6
42. Erasable electrostatic lithography, Electronics with nanotubes,
nanowires, and carbon-60 1 C 1-4 4-6
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books, Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1. Sami Franssila, “Introduction to Microfabrication”, Wiley Publications, 2010
2. Sorab. K. Gandhi, "VLSI Fabrication and Principles", McGraw Hill, 2005
3. Richard C.Jaeger, “Introduction to Microelectronic Fabrication”, Prentice hall, 2002
4. Bo Cui, “Recent advances in Nanofabrication Techniques and Applications”, InTech Publisher, 2011
5. A G Davies and J M T Thompson, “Advances in Nanoengineering Electronics, Materials and
Assembly”,Imperial College Press, 2007
6. Michael Pycraft Hughes , “Nanoelectromechanics in Engineering and Biology”, by CRC Press LLC, 2003
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
40 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT305L Micro and Nanofabrication Laboratory L T P C
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: 15NT305
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanofabrication
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To gain knowledge in Micro and Nano fabrication Processes
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Gain basic knowledge on micro and nanofabrication processes used
electronic devices a c k
2. Develop understanding of fundamental issues, ideas and results
involved in microfabrication a b c k
3. Acquire experience in micro-fabrication processes k c
4. Provide basic knowledge in Thin film fabrication k e
Sl. No. Description of experiments Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
1 To perform wafer cleaning processes followed for VLSI
applications 3 I,O 1-4 1-5
2 To oxidize silicon under O2 ambient using temperature
controlled furnace 3 D,I,O 1-4 1-5
3 To deposit Al thin film on the oxidized silicon surface 3 I,O 1-4 1-5
4 To perform patterning by photolithography process 3 I,O 1-4 1-5
5 To perform wet chemical etching of silicon dioxide and
metal thin films. 3 I,O 1-4 1-5
6 To fabricate MOS capacitor and study its I-V characteristics 3 D,I,O 1-4 1-5
7 To pattern nanostructures using E-Beam lithography 3 I,O 1-4 1-5
8 To analyze nanostructures defined by E-Beam lithography
using AFM 3 I,O 1-4 1-5
9 To do nanolithography by scanning probe microscopy 3 I,O 1-4 1-5
Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. References
1 Micro and Nano Fabrication Laboratory Course Material, 2016
2 Sami Franssila, “Introduction to Microfabrication”, Wiley Publications, 2010
3 Sorab. K. Gandhi, "VLSI Fabrication and Principles", McGraw Hill, 2005
4 Richard C.Jaeger, “Introduction to Microelectronic Fabrication”, Prentice Hall, 2002
5 A G Davies and J M T Thompson, “Advances in Nanoengineering Electronics, Materials and Assembly”,
Imperial College Press, 2007
Course nature Practical
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Voce Model examination Total
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%
41 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Purpose
Students of any specialization at an undergraduate level learn courses related to various sub-domains
(Multi-disciplinary) of their specialization individually. They are not exposed to understanding how the
various multi-disciplinary fields interact and integrate in real life situations. It is very common that an
expert in a particular domain models and designs systems or products oblivious of the impact of other
subsystems. This lack of multi-disciplinary thinking is very blatantly visible when the students take up
their major project during their final year. This course aims to develop appropriate skills on systemic
thinking on how to identify and formulate a problem, decompose the problem into smaller elements,
coneptualise the design, evaluate the conceptual design by using scientific, engineering and managerial
tools, select, analyze and interpret the data, consideration of safety, socio-politico-cultural, risks and
hazards, disposal, regional and national laws, costing and financial model and undertake documentation
and finally presentation.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able
1.
To subdivide a complex system into smaller disciplinary models,
manage their interfaces and reintegrate them into an overall
system model
a c e f i l
2. To rationalize a system architecture or product design problem by
selecting appropriate design variables, parameters and constraints a c e f i l
3. To design for value and quantitatively assess the expected
lifecycle cost of a new system or product a c e f i l
4. To take on the challenges of teamwork, prepare a presentation in a
professional manner, and document all aspects of design work. a c e f i l
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
1 Introduction: Facilitating Multidisciplinary Projects
C,D,I,O 1,2,3,4
2 Identifying and formulating a problem
3 System Modelling
4
Thinking perspectives: Decomposition–Composition Thinking
Hierarchical Thinking, Organizational Thinking, Life-Cycle
Thinking, Safety Thinking, Risk Thinking, Socio-politico-cultural
thinking, Environment thinking
5 Decomposing a system – Identifying the major sub-systems
6 Mathematical Modeling and Governing equations for each sub
systems
7 Objectives, Constraints and Design Variables
8 Conceptual Design
9
Collaborative Design – Disciplinary teams satisfy the local
constraints while trying to match the global constraints set by the
project coordinator.
10 Tools for modeling, designing, analysis, data interpretation,
decision making etc
11 Design Analysis, evaluation and selection
15NT401M Multi-Disciplinary Design L T P C
2 2 0 3
Co-requisite:
Prerequisite:
Data Book / Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
42 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
12 Costing and Financial model
13 Documentation, reviewing and presentation
Total contact hours 60
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. References
1.
2.
Systems Design and Engineering: Facilitating Multidisciplinary Development Projects
G. Maarten Bonnema, Karel T. Veenvliet, Jan F. Broenink December 15, 2015, CRC Press
ISBN 9781498751261
Exploring Digital Design-Multi-Disciplinary Design Practices, Ina Wagner , Tone Bratteteig , Dagny
Stuedahl, Springer-Verlag London, 2010, ISSN:1431-1496
Additional references can be included by the respective departments based on the domain and / or theme.
Course nature Predominantly Practice complimented by theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Review 1 Review 2 Review 3 Review 4 Total
Weightage 10% 25% 25% 40% 100%
End semester examination Weightage : 0%
Pedagogy:
Theme or major/broad domains will be announced by the department every semester. Multi-disciplinary designs will be
made by the students in groups (group size may be decided by the course coordinator), with the topic of interest falling
within the theme or major/broad domains as announced by the department, applying any combinations of the disciplines
in engineering. 3D modelling and / or simulation must be used to validate the design.
In a combination of lecture and hands-on experiences, students must be exposed to understand and analyse engineering
designs (or products) and systems, their realization process and project management. Analysis of the design criteria for
safety, ergonomics, environment, life cycle cost and sociological impact is to be covered. Periodic oral and written
status reports are required. The course culminates in a comprehensive written report and oral presentation. If required
guest lecturers from industry experts from the sub-domains may be arranged to provide an outside perspective and show
how the system design is being handled by the industry. The Conceive Design Implement Operate (CDIO) principles
must be taught to the students.
A full-scale fabrication is not within the purview /scope of this course. Of course this design, if scalable and approved
by the department, can be extended as the major project work
This course is 100% internal continuous assessment.
43 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT403 Nanomagnetism L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanomaterials
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
The course aims at providing the solid basis in magnetism required to know the fundamentals at
the atomic/sub-atomic levels, and understand the magnetic properties of nanostructures. The
fundamental concepts could be illustrated by the recent examples along with the contemporary
knowledge
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Address the intrinsic properties of materials and to correlate them with
the extrinsic factors a e
2. Know which nanomagnetic materials of various structures and
dimensions and also will help to understand the their characterizations
methodologies
a
3. Develop a deep knowledge about the magnetic nanoparticles, self
assembly of magnetic nanoparticles, magnetic clusters, assembled
nanoparticles and nanobiomagnetics and their application in various
fields
a c
4. Learners should be able to provide physical explanation in key concepts
of transport phenomena involved in electron spins in magnetic resistance
effects
c
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Basic of Nanomagnetism 9
1. Basis of magnetism – diamagnetism, paramagnetism,
ferromagnetism, antiferomagnetism, ferrimagnetism 1 C 1-4 1
2. The hysteresis loop, domains and domain walls 1 C 1 1,2
3. Units in magnetism 1 C 1 2
4. Zeeman energy, magnetic anisotropy energy 1 C,D 1 1
5. Exchange energy, magnetostatic energy 1 C 1 2
6. Dipolar interactions, ways to handle dipolar fields 1 C 1 1
7. The bloch domain wall, simple variational model 1 C 1 1
8. Defining the width of a domain wall 1 C 1 1
9. Magnetic anisotropy, crystal anisotropy, shape anisotropy 1 C 1,3 2
Unit II – Magnetism and Magnetic Domain in Low
Dimensions 9
10. Magnetic ordering in low dimensions 1 C 2,3 1
11. Dipolar anisotropy 1 C 2,3 1
12. Interface magnetic anisotropy 1 C 1,2,3 1
13. Magnetoelastic anisotropy 1 C 2,3 1
14. Domain wall angle 1 C 1,2 1
15. Vortices and antivortex 1 C 2 1
16. Films with out-of-plane anisotropy 1 C 2 1
17. Domains in nanostructures with in-plane magnetization 1 C 2 1
18. Domains in nanostructures with out-of-plane magnetization 1 C 2,3 1
Unit III – Nanosized Magnetic Materials 8
19. Magnetism of thin films and multilayers 1 C 3 2
20. Thin Films: planar systems, laterally structured systems and 1 C 3 2
44 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
anisotropy in thin films
21. Domain walls and magnetization reversal in thin films, exchange
bias 1 C 3 2
22. Nanoparticles from multilayer precursors 1 C 3 2
23. Formation and superstructural development of epitaxially grown
FePt Nanoparticles 1 C 3 2
24. Self-assembly of magnetic nanoparticles 1 C 3 2
25. Cluster-assembled nanoparticles, experiment for cluster
preparation 1 C 3 2
26. Elemental and alloy clusters- FePt and CoPt nanoclusters 1 C 3 2
Unit IV: Characterization and Applications of Nanomagnets 8
27. Introduction to electron microscopy methods 1 C 2 2
28. Nanostructured magnetic materials 1 C 2 2
29. Magnetic recording principles of magnetic recording 1 C 3 1
30. Novel magnetic recording systems - nanodisk and nanoring
memories 1 C 3 1
31. Domain wall memories 1 C 3 1
32. Targeting-magnetic separation 1 C 3 2
33. Magnetic tweezers-drug and gene delivery 1 C 3 2
34. Magnetic resonance imaging, Magneto transport 1 C 3 2
Unit V: Magnetotransport and Spin Electronics 8
35. Introduction to magnetotransport 1 C 4 1
36. Spin dependent scattering and giant magneto resistance 1 C 4 1
37. Valet–Fert model for GMR 1 C 4 1
38. Tunnel Magneto Resistance (TMR) 1 C 4 1
39. Nanostructures for spin electronics - basics 1 C 4 2
40. Read heads and magnetic data storage 1 C 4 2
41. Magnetic random access memories 1 C 4 2
42. Spintronic biosensors and Spin transistors 1 C 4 2
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test I 1
44. Cycle test II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Text Books/Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1 Alberto P. Guimaraes, “Principles of Nanomagnetism”, XII, Springer Berlin Heidelberg New York, 2009
2 David Sellmyer, Ralph Skomski, “Advanced Magnetic Nanostructures”, Springer Heidelberg, 2010
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
45 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT404 Polymer and Nanocomposites L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core Nanomaterials
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose The purpose of this course is to provide a basic knowledge about polymer and the composite materials.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the basics of polymer science a
2. Gain knowledge on theoretical background about nanocomposites e
3. Gain insight about the importance of polymers in nanotechnology e
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Introduction to Polymers 9
1. Importance of polymers: basic concept 1 C 1,3 1,2
2. Classification of polymers on the basis of microstructures
macrostructures and properties, application 1 C 1 1,2
3. Chain structure and configuration 1 C 1 1,2
4. Homo and heteropolymers - copolymers-chemistry of
polymerization 1 C 1 1,2
5. Characterization of polymers-molecular, solution, melt, elastomer,
solid state, surface, interface 1 C 1,3 1,2
6. Properties: glass transition temperature (Tg) and melting point
(Tm),Factors affecting Tg and Tm, Importance of Tg 1 C,D 1,3 1,2
7. Molecular weights and degree of polymerization- reactions and
kinetics of polymerization 1 C,D 1,3 1,2
8. Properties- mechanical, dielectric constant, polarization; Dissipation
factor 1 C 2 1,2
9. Polymeric nanostructure- ordered polymer, block co-polymer,
surface micelles 1 C 1,2 1,2
Unit II: Metal – Polymer nanocomposites 9
10. Physical and chemical properties of nanosized metal particles 1 C 1,2 2,3
11. Metal containing polymers: cryochemical synthesis, structure and
physio-chemical properties 1 C 1,2 2,3
12. Controlled pyrolysis of metal containing precursors 1 C 1,2 2,3
13. Nanostructured polymer nanoreactors for metal particle formation 1 C 1,2 2,3
14. Metal-polymer nanocomposite synthesis, Ex-situ, In-situ 1 C 1,2 2,3
15. Plasmon absorption of embedded nanoparticles 1 C 1,2 2,3
16. Magnetooptics of granular nano materials, New optical method of
magnetic nanoparticles and nanostructures imaging 1 C 1,2 2,3
17. Optical extinction of metal nano particles synthesized in polymer by
ion implantation 1 C 1,2 2,3
18. Optically anisotropic metal polymer nanocomposites 1 C 1,2 2,3
Unit III: Polymer Matrix Nanocomposites 8
19. Polymer/ clay nanocomposites: synthesis of NCH composites and
characterization 1 C 1-3 4
20. Crystal structure of NCH, properties of NCH 1 C 1-3 4
21. Polypropylene layered silicate nanocomposites 1 C 1-3 4
22. Epoxy nanocomposite system, future trends 1 C 1-3 4
23. Biodegradable polymer/layered silicate nanocomposites- categories,
properties, drawback 1 C 1-3 4
24. Polymer layer silicate nanocomposites- technology, structure,
properties and characterisation 1 C 1-3 4
46 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
25. Poly(ethyl acrylate)/bentonitenano composites and Poly(butylene
terephthlate) (PBT) based nanocomposites 1 C 1-3 4
26. Polymer/calcium carbonate nanocomposites 1 C 1-3 4
Unit IV: Metal Matrix Nanocomposites 8
27. Introduction to metal matrix composites, reinforcements, matrix
materials 1 C 2 5
28. Mechanism of reinforcement- long fiber, short fiber, particulate 1 C,D 2 5
29. Interlayer in metal matrix composites-characterization and relevance
to material properties 1 C,D 2 5
30. Processing of nanocomposites- Liquid Processes, Semi-Solid
Processes, Solid Processes 1 C 2 5
31. Production of composite by thermal coating process 1 C 2 5
32. Structure and properties of sprayed coatings, adhesion of thermally
sprayed coating 1 C 2 5
33. Machinability aspects of metal matrix composites, Mechanical
behavior and fatigue properties of MMC 1 C 2 5
34. Strengthening mechanisms, application 1 C 2 5
Unit V: Ceramic Matrix Nanocomposites 8
35. Introduction to ceramic matrix composites, fibrous monolithic
ceramic, fiber reinforced 1 C 2 6
36. Whisker reinforced ceramic matrix composite 1 C 2 6
37. Particulate reinforced, graded and layered ceramic composite 1 C 2 6
38. Nanophase ceramic composites 1 C 2 6
39. Processing- microstructural control of metal reinforced ceramic
matrix nanocomposites 1 C 2 6
40. Refractory and speciality ceramic composites and interface in non-
oxide ceramic composites 1 C 2 6
41. Machinable nanocomposite ceramics- Silicon nitride and silicon
carbide based ceramics 1 C 2 6
42. Functionally graded ceramics- clay nanocomposites 1 C 2 6
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test I 1
44. Cycle test II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books/ Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1. Gowariker V.R., Viswanathan N.V., Sreedhar J., “Polymer Science”, New age International publications,
2005
2. Alfred Rudin, “The elements of polymer science and engineering”, 2nd edition, Academic press publication,
1999
3. Luigi Nicolais, Gianfranco Carotenuto,“Metal–polymerNanocomposites”,Wiley-Interscience,2005
4. Yiu-Wing Mai,Zhong-Zhen yu, “Polymernanocomposites”,CRC press,2006
5. Karl U. Kainer, “Metal Matrix Composites”,Wiley-VCH publisher, 2005
6. Low I. M., “Ceramic matrix composites: Microstructure, properties and applications”,Woodhead
Publishing Limited, 2006
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
47 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT404L Polymer and Nanocomposites Laboratory L T P C
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: 15NT404
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core Nanomaterials
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose The purpose of this course is to provide a basic knowledge about polymer and the composite
materials.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Comprehend the fundamentals of polymerization techniques a k
2. Device protocols for nanocomposite synthesis. b k
3. Develop the skills in synthesizing polymer networks and
hydrogel b k
4. Make the learner familiarize with testing of thermal and
mechanical properties of polymer and nanocomposites b k
Sl.
No. Description of experiments
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
1. Polymerization of Acrylamide in water 3 D,I 1 1,2,3,4
2. Interfacial Polymerization of polyamide from Diamine and Diacid
Chloride. 3 D,I 3 1,2,3, 4
3. Polymerization of Methyl Methacrylate Monomer to Form Poly
(Methyl Methacrylate). 3 D,I 1,3 1,2,3,5
4. Synthesis of Hydrogels from Acrylamide and N-isopropyl Acrylamide
with Bisacrylamide in Water 3 D,I 3 1,2,3,4,5
5. Study of glass transition, melting and crystallization temperature of
Polyethylene terephthalate (PET)/ Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) 3 D,I 4 1,2,3,6
6. Preparation of metal-polymer nanocomposites 3 D,I,O 2 1,2,3,7
7. Synthesis of particulate reinforced metal matrix composites 3 D,I 2 1,2,3,8
8. Interlayers in metal matrix composites : characterisation and relevance
for the material properties 3 D,I,O 4 1,2,3,8
9. Preparation of ceramic based nanocomposites 3 D,I,O 2 1,8,3,9
Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Reference Books/Other Reading Material
10. Polymer and nanocomposites laboratory course material, 2016
11. V.R., Viswanathan N.V. and Jayader Sreedhar , “Polymer Science”, New age International publications,
2005
12. Alfred rudin , “The elements of polymer science and engineering”, 2nd edition, Academic press publication,
1999
13. http://www.chemistry2011.org/ResourceFiles/6.pdf
14. http://www.chemistry2011.org/ResourceFiles/10.pdf
15. http://www.kompasiana.com/hardiyantoputra/differential-scanning-calorimetry-dsc-analysis-for-
polyethylene-and-polystyrene-behavior_54f82215a33311275e8b45a7
16. Luigi Nicolais, Gianfranco Carotenuto“Metal–polymerNanocomposites”,Wiley-Interscience,2005
17. Karl U. Kainer, “Metal Matrix Composites”, Wiley-VCH publisher, 2005
18. I. M. Low “Ceramic matrix composites: Microstructure, properties and applications”,[[Woodhead
Publishing Limited, 2006
Course nature Practical
Assessment Method – Practical Component
In-semester Assessment tool Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Voce Model examination Total
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%
48 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT405 Industrial Nanotechnology L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core Nanomaterials
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To provide knowledge of various industrial applications of nanotechnology
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Elucidate on advantages of nanotechnology based applications in each industry a
2. Provide instances of contemporary industrial applications of nanotechnology a d e
3. Provide an overview of future technological advancements and increasing role
of nanotechnology in each industry a
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Nanotechnology in Electrical and Electronics Industry 9
1. Nano electrical and electronic devices: advantageous 1 C 1-3 1,2
2. Data storage and memory 1 C 1-3 1,2
3. Micro and nanoelectromechanical systems 1 C 1-3 1,2
4. Lasers, lighting and displays 1 C 1-3 1,2
5. Batteries 1 C 1-3 1,2
6. Fuel cells 1 C 1-3 1,2
7. Photovoltaic cells 1 C 1-3 1,2
8. Electric double layer capacitors 1 C 1-3 1,2
9. Nanoparticle coatings for electrical products 1 C 1-3 1,2
Unit II: Nanotechnology In Biomedical And Pharmaceutical
Industry 9
10. Nanoparticles in bone substitutes and dentistry 1 C 1-3 3,4
11. Tissue engineering/regenerative medicine 1 C 1-3 3,4
12. Scaffolds for tissue engineering 1 C 1-3 3,4
13. Nanorobotics in surgery 1 C 1-3 3,4
14. Drug delivery advantages of nanostructured delivery systems 1 C 1-3 3,4
15. Activation and targeting of nanotechnology-based drug delivery
systems 1 C 1-3 3,4
16. Cancer diagnostics and therapy: why nanotechnology? 1 C 1-3 3,4
17. Nanotools for early cancer detection 1 C 1-3 3,4
18. Nanomedicine for cancer treatment 1 C 1-3 3,4
Unit III: Nanotechnology for Environment Applications 8
19. Nanotechnostructured catalysts TiO2nanoparticles for water
purification: background of TiO2 as a semiconductor photocatalyst 1 C 1-4 5,6
20. Photocatalytic mechanism, general pathways, and kinetics 1 C 1-3 5,6
21. Photocatalytic degradation of specific waterborne pollutants 1 C 1-3 5,6
22. Nanoparticles for treatment of arsenic 1 C 1-3 5,6
23. Treatment of arsenic using nanoparticles other than TIO2 1 C 1-3 5,6
24. Nanoscale carbon materials for contaminant separation 1 C 1-3 5,6
25. Nanostructured metal oxide gas sensors for air-quality monitoring 1 C 1-3 5,6
26. The gas-sensing mechanism, integrated solid-state sensors 1 C 1-3 5,6
Unit IV - Nanotechnology in Agriculture and Food Technology 8
27. Nanotechnology in agriculture 1 C 1-3 7,8
28. Precision farming, smart delivery system 1 C 1-3 7,8
29. Insecticides using nanotechnology 1 C 1-3 7,8
30. Potential of nano-fertilizers 1 C 1-3 7,8
31. Nanotechnology in food industry 1 C 1-3 7,8
32. Packaging, Food processing 1 C 1-3 7,8
49 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
33. Food safety and biosecurity 1 C 1-3 7,8
34. Contaminant detection and smart packaging 1 C 1-3 7,8
Unit V - Nanotechnology in Textiles And Cosmetics 8
35. Nanofibre production –electrospinning, controlling morphologies
of nanofibers 1 C 1-3 9-10
36. Multifunctional polymer nanocomposites 1 C 1-3 9-10
37. Carbon nanotubes and nanocomposites 1 C 1-3 9-10
38. Nano-filled polypropylene fibers 1 C 1-3 9-10
39. Nano finishing in textiles (UV resistant, antibacterial,)
hydrophilic, self-cleaning, flame retardant finishes) 1 C 1-3 9-10
40. Cosmetics – formulation of gels 1 C 1-3 9-10
41. Formulation of shampoos, hair-conditioners (micellar self-
assembly and its manipulation) 1 C 1-3 9-10
42. Sun-screen dispersions for UV protection using Titanium oxide –
color cosmetics 1 C 1-3 9-10
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test I 1
44. Cycle test II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books/Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1. Mark A.R., Daniel Ratner, “Nanotechnology: A Gentle Introduction to the Next Big Idea”, Pearson
Education, India,2003
2. Bharat Bhushan,“Handbook of Nanotechnology”, Springer, Barnes & Noble,2004
3. Eelina H. Malsch, “Biomedical Nanotechnology”, CRC Press,2005
4. Kenneth E.G.,Craig R.H., Cato T.L., Lakshmi S.N., “Biomedical Nanostructures”, John Wiley & Sons Inc.,
2008
5. Maqhong Fan, Huang C.P., Alan E.B., “Environanotechnology”,Elsevier,2010
6. Tian C.Z., Rao Y.S., Keith C.K.L., Zhiqiang H.,Tyagi R.D., Irene M.C.L, “Nanotechnologies For Water
Environment Applications”, ASCE publications, 2009
7. Jennifer Kuzma and Peter VerHage, “Nanotechnology in agriculture and food production”, Woodrow
Wilson International Center,2006
8. Lynn J. Frewer, Willehm Norde, Fischer R. H. and Kampers W. H., “Nanotechnology in the Agri-food
sector”,Wiley-VCH Verlag,2011
9. P. J. Brown and K. Stevens, “Nanofibers and Nanotechnology in Textiles”, Woodhead Publishing Limited,
Cambridge, 2007
10. Mai Y-W., “PolymerNano composites”, Woodhead publishing, 2006
11. Chang W.N., “Nanofibres fabrication, performance and applications’, Nova Science Publishers Inc, 2009
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
50 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Purpose To obtain an hands-on experience in converting a small novel idea / technique into a working
model / prototype involving multi-disciplinary skills and / or knowledge and working in at team.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To conceptualise a novel idea / technique into a product c
2. To think in terms of multi-disciplinary environment d
3. To understand the management techniques of implementing a project k
4. To take on the challenges of teamwork, prepare a presentation in a
professional manner, and document all aspects of design work. g
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
An Multidisciplinary project to be taken up by a team of maximum
of ten students. Development of prototype product, a 3D model,
simulation, blueprint for a larger project and any other development
work are permitted. The contribution of the individuals in the
project should be clearly brought out. A combined report is to be
submitted. A presentation is to be made for the reviewers on the
work done by the candidate.
C,D,I 1,2,3,4
Total contact hours
Course nature Project – 100% internal continuous assessment
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Refer the table Total
Weightage Refer the table below 100%
End semester examination Weightage : 0%
15NT376L Minor Project II L T P C
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite:
Prerequisite:
Data Book / Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
51 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Assessment components
Assessment
component Expected outcome Evaluators
Criteria or
basis Marks
Project
proposal
(Review – I)
A short presentation to be delivered on:
A brief, descriptive project title (2-4 words). This is
critical!
The 3 nearest competitors (existing solutions) and
price.
Team members name, phone number, email,
department/degree program, and year.
A description of the product opportunity that has
been identified. To include: Documentation of the
market need, shortcomings of existing competitive
products, and definition of the target market and its
size.
Proposed supervisor / guide
Panel of
reviewers
Viability /
feasibility of
the project
Extent of
preliminary
work done.
0
Review II
Mission Statement / Techniques
Concept Sketches, Design Specifications / Modules
& Techniques along with System architecture
Coding
Panel of
reviewers
Originality,
Multi-
disciplinary
component,
clarity of idea
and
presentation,
team work,
handling
Q&A.
20
Review III
Final Concept and Model / Algorithm/ Technique
Drawings, Plans / programme output
Financial Model / costing
Prototype / Coding
Final Presentation and Demonstration
Panel of
reviewers
Originality,
Multi-
disciplinary
component,
clarity of idea
and
presentation,
team work,
handling
Q&A.
50
Final
technical
Report
A good technical report Supervisor
/ Guide
Regularity,
systematic
progress,
extent of work
and quality of
work
30
Total 100
52 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Purpose To enhance the disseminating skills of the student about the current and contemporary research
work that are being carried out across the world.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To understand the research methodology adopted by various researchers h i j
2. To mathematically model a problem, critically analyse it and adopt
strategies to solve b c e
3. To understand and present a well documented research e g
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Guidelines for conducting 15NT381L Seminar for B.Tech
1. Upon registering for the course the student must identify a sub-
domain of the degree specialization that is of interest to the
student and start collecting research papers as many as possible.
2. After collecting sufficient number of research papers the student
must peruse all the papers, meet the course faculty and discuss
on the salient aspects of each and every paper.
3. The course faculty, after discussion with the student will approve
TWO research papers that is appropriate for presentation.
4. The student must collect additional relevant reference materials
to supplement and compliment the two research papers and start
preparing the presentation.
5. Each student must present a 15-minute presentation on each of
the approved research paper to the panel of evaluators.
6. The presenter must present one research paper within the first
half of the semester (6 weeks) and another research paper in the
next half of the semester (6 weeks) as per the schedule.
7. All other students registered for the course will form the
audience.
8. The audience as well as the evaluators will probe the student
with appropriate questions and solicit response from the
presenter.
9. The presentation will be evaluated against 7 to 8 assessment
criteria by 4 to 5 evaluators.
10. The score obtained through the presentations of TWO research
papers will be converted to appropriate percentage of marks.
This course is 100% internal continuous assessment.
C,D 1,2,3,4
Total contact hours
15NT381L Seminar II L T P C
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Course nature 100% internal continuous assessment.
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Presentation 1 Presentation 2 Total
Weightage 50% 50% 100%
End semester examination Weightage : 0%
53 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
EVALUATION OF SEMINAR PRESENTATIONS
Name of the Student: Date:
Register Number: Degree and Branch:
Topic:
Sl. No. Criteria for Assessment Evaluator 1 Evaluator 2 Evaluator 3 Evaluator 4 Evaluator 5
1 Understanding of the subject
2 Clarity of presentation
3 Appropriate use of Audio visual
aids
4 Whether cross references have been
consulted
5 Ability to respond to questions on
the subject
6 Time scheduling
7 Completeness of preparation
8
Overall Grades:
Remarks:
Signature of Course Coordinator
Poor 1 Below Average 2 Average 3 Good 4 Very Good 5
54 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Purpose
To offer students the opportunity to study with the world’s best universities by integrating select
MOOCs in a regular degree programme and providing students full credit transfer, as per
university regulations, if they earn a “Verified / Completion Certificate” and take a proctored
examination through a secure, physical testing center.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To apply the concepts, theories, laws, technologies learnt herein to
provide engineering solutions. f h i j
Course nature Online - 100% internal continuous
assessment.
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Quiz Assignment
Non-proctored /
Unsupervised Tests
Proctored /
Supervised Test Total
Weightage 25% 25% 10% 40% 100%
End semester examination Weightage : 0%
Registration process, Assessment and Credit Transfer:
1. Students can register for courses offered by approved global MOOCs platforms like edX, Coursera or Universities
with which SRM partners specifically for MOOCs.
2. Annually, each department must officially announce, to the students as well as to the Controller of Examinations,
the list of courses that will be recognised and accepted for credit transfer.
3. The department must also officially announce / appoint one or more faculty coordinator(s) for advising the
students attached to them, monitoring their progress and assist the department in proctoring the tests, uploading the
marks / grades, and collecting and submitting the graded certificate(s) to the CoE, within the stipulated timeframe.
4. Student who desires to pursue a course, from the above department-approved list, through MOOCs must register
for that course during the course registration process of the Faculty of Engineering and Technology, SRM
University.
5. The maximum credit limits for course registration at SRM will include the MOOCs course registered.
6. The student must periodically submit the marks / grades obtained in various quizzes, assignments, tests etc
immediately to the Faculty Advisor or the Course Coordinator for uploading in the university’s academic module.
7. The student must take the final test as a Proctored / Supervised test in the university campus.
8. The student must submit the “Certificate of Completion” as well as the final overall Marks and / or Grade within
the stipulated time for effecting the grade conversion and credit transfer, as per the regulations. It is solely the
responsibility of the individual student to fulfil the above conditions to earn the credits.
9. The attendance for this course, for the purpose of awarding attendance grade, will be considered 100% , if the
credits are transferred, after satisfying the above (1) to (7) norms; else if the credits are not transferred or
transferable, the attendance will be considered as ZERO.
15NT386L Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCs) II L T P C
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
55 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Purpose To provide short-term work experience in an Industry/ Company/ Organisation
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To get an inside view of an industry and organization/company j
2. To gain valuable skills and knowledge j
3. To make professional connections and enhance networking f g
4. To get experience in a field to allow the student to make a career
transition i
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
1. It is mandatory for every student to undergo this course.
2. Every student is expected to spend a minimum of 15-days in
an Industry/ Company/ Organization, during the summer
vacation.
3. The type of industry must be NOT below the Medium Scale
category in his / her domain of the degree programme.
4. The student must submit the “Training Completion
Certificate” issued by the industry / company / Organisation
as well as a technical report not exceeding 15 pages, within
the stipulated time to be eligible for making a presentation
before the committee constituted by the department.
5. The committee will then assess the student based on the
report submitted and the presentation made.
6. Marks will be awarded out of maximum 100.
7. Appropriate grades will be assigned as per the regulations.
8. Only if a student gets a minimum of pass grade, appropriate
credit will be transferred towards the degree requirements, as
per the regulations.
9. It is solely the responsibility of the individual student to
fulfill the above conditions to earn the credits.
10. The attendance for this course, for the purpose of awarding
attendance grade, will be considered 100%, if the credits are
transferred, after satisfying the above (1) to (8) norms; else if
the credits are not transferred or transferable, the attendance
will be considered as ZERO.
11. The committee must recommend redoing the course, if it
collectively concludes, based on the assessment made from
the report and presentations submitted by the student, that
either the level of training received or the skill and / or
knowledge gained is NOT satisfactory.
D, I,O 1,2,3,4
Total contact hours
Course nature Training – 100% internal continuous assessment
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Presentation Report Total
Weightage 80% 20% 100%
End semester examination Weightage : 0%
15NT391L Internship / Industrial Training II L T P C
0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval --- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
56 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Purpose To impart an insight into the current industrial trends and practices
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To obtain an insight into the current industrial trends and practices j
2. To obtain an insight into the technologies adopted by industries j
3. To obtain an insight into the technical problems encountered by the
industries and the scope for providing solutions. h
4. To network with industry g
Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
1. The department will identify and shortlist few emerging topics that
are trending in industry.
2. The department will identify experts from industry who are willing
to deliver modules on the shortlisted topics.
3. The identified expert will assist the department in formulating the
course content to be delivered as a 30-hour module, prepare lectures
notes, ppt, handouts and other learning materials.
4. The department will arrange to get the necessary approvals for
offering the course, from the university’s statutory academic bodies
well before the actual offering.
5. The department must officially announce, to the students as well as
to the Controller of Examinations, the list of courses that will be
offered as industry module.
6. The department must also officially announce / appoint one or more
faculty coordinator(s) for advising the students attached to them,
monitoring their progress and assist the department in
proctoring/supervising/assessment the quizzes, assignments, tests
etc, uploading the marks, attendance etc, within the stipulated
timeframe.
7. The Student who desires to pursue a course, from the above
department-approved list, must register for that course during the
course registration process of the Faculty of Engineering and
Technology, SRM University.
8. The maximum credit limits for course registration at SRM will
include the Industry Module also.
9. All academic requirements of a professional course like minimum
attendance, assessment methods, discipline etc will be applicable for
this Industry Module.
10. The course will be conducted on week ends or beyond the college
regular working hours.
C,D,I,O 1,2,3,4
Total contact hours 30
Course nature 100% internal continuous assessment.
Assessment Method – Theory Component (Weightage 50%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage 50%
15NT491L Industry Module II L T P C
0 0 3 2
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Professional
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
57 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Purpose
The Major Project experience is the culminating academic endeavor of students who earn a degree
in their Undergraduate Programs. The project provides students with the opportunity to explore a
problem or issue of particular personal or professional interest and to address that problem or issue
through focused study and applied research under the direction of a faculty member. The project
demonstrates the student's ability to synthesize and apply the knowledge and skills acquired in
his/her academic program to real-world issues and problems. This final project affirms students'
ability to think critically and creatively, to solve practical problems, to make reasoned and ethical
decisions, and to communicate effectively.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able
1. To provide students with the opportunity to apply the knowledge
and skills acquired in their courses to a specific problem or issue. a c e f i
2.
To allow students to extend their academic experience into areas of
personal interest, working with new ideas, issues, organizations,
and individuals.
a c e f i
3.
To encourage students to think critically and creatively about
academic, professional, or social issues and to further develop their
analytical and ethical leadership skills necessary to address and
help solve these issues.
a c e f h i
4.
To provide students with the opportunity to refine research skills
and demonstrate their proficiency in written and/or oral
communication skills.
a c e f g i
5. To take on the challenges of teamwork, prepare a presentation in a
professional manner, and document all aspects of design work. d g
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
1. The Major project is a major component of our engineering
curriculum: it is the culmination of the program of study
enabling the students to showcase the knowledge and the skills
they have acquired during the previous four years, design a
product/service of significance, and solve an open-ended
problem in engineering.
2. Each student must register to the project course related to his or
her program
3. Major Project course consists of one semester and would be
allowed to register only during the final year of study.
4. The Major Project may be initiated during the pre-final semester
but will be assessed and credits transferred only during the last
semester of study, upon completion of all other degree
requirements. Generally the undergraduate major project is a
team based one.
5. Each team in the major project course will consist of maximum
of 5 students.
6. Each project will be assigned a faculty, who will act as the
supervisor.
7. The project shall be driven by realistic constraints like that
related to economic, environmental, social, political, ethical,
health & safety, manufacturability and sustainability.
15NT496L Major Project L T P C
0 0 24 12
Co-requisite:
Prerequisite:
Data Book / Codes/Standards
Course Category P Professional Core
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
58 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
8. Each group must document and implement a management
structure. Group leadership roles must be clearly identified
including who has responsibility for monitoring project
deliverables and group coordination.
9. A group project may be interdisciplinary, with students enrolled
in different engineering degrees, or in Engineering plus other
faculties such as Management, Medical and Health Sciences,
Science and Humanities.
10. Each student team is expected to maintain a log book that would
normally be used to serve as a record of the way in which the
project progressed during the course of the session.
11. Salient points discussed at meetings with the supervisor (i.e.,
suggestions for further meetings, changes to experimental
procedures) should be recorded by the student in order to
provide a basis for subsequent work.
12. The logbook may be formally assessed;
13. The contribution of each individual team member will be clearly
identified and the weightage of this component will be explicitly
considered while assessing the work done.
14. A project report is to be submitted on the topic which will be
evaluated during the final review.
15. Assessment components will be as spelt out in the regulations.
16. The department will announce a marking scheme for awarding
marks for the different sections of the report.
17. The project report must possess substantial technical depth and
require the students to exercise analytical, evaluation and design
skills at the appropriate level.
C,D,I,O 1,2,3,
4, 5
Total contact hours
Course nature Project – 100 % Internal continuous
Assessment
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Review 1 Review 2 Review 3 Total
Weightage 10% 15% 20% 45%
End semester examination Assessment Tool Project Report Viva Voce
Weightage : 25% 30% 55%
59 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT301E Carbon Nanotechnology L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To provide an adequate knowledge in various carbon Nanostructures
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the geometry of various carbon nanostructures. a
2. Acquire the knowledge of various synthesis and characterization
techniques of carbon nanostructures a b
3. Understand the structure and properties of different carbon
nanostructures a
4. Acquire the knowledge of various applications of carbon nanostructures a
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: The Geometry of Nanoscale Carbon 9
1. Introduction –carbon molecules-nature of the carbon bond-
new carbon structures 1 C 1 1,2
2. Discovery of C60 1 C 1 1,2
3. Structure of C60 and its crystal 1 C 1 1,2
4. From a graphene sheet to a nanotube 1 C 1 1
5. Single wall and multi walled nanotubes 1 C 1 1
6. Zigzag and armchair nanotubes 1 C 1 1
7. Chirality in nanotubes 1 C 1 2
8. Structure and bonding of defective nanotubes 1 C 1 2
9. Euler's theorem in cylindrical and defective nanotubes 1 C 1 2
Unit II: Fullerenes 9
10. Structure and bonding- nomenclature, C60 and higher
fullerenes 1
C 1,2 1,2
11. Growth mechanisms; production and purification 1 C 2 1,2
12. Fullerene preparation by pyrolysis of hydrocarbons, partial
combustion of hydrocarbons 1 C 2 1,2
13. Fullerene preparation by arc discharge methods 1 C 2 1,2
14. Fullerene preparation by production by resistive heating,
rational syntheses 1 C 2 1,2
15. Physical properties and chemical properties: hydrogenation 1 C 2,3 1,2
16. Applications of fullerenes: fullerenes in solar cell 1 C 2,3 1,2
17. Fullerenes as donor–acceptor systems 1 C 2,3 1,2
18. Fullerenes as chemical sensors 1 C 2,3 1,2
Unit III : Carbon Nanotubes 8
19. The structure of carbon nanotubes- nomenclature 1 C 1,3 1,2
20. Electronic properties of CNTs 1 C 1,3 1,2
21. Synthesis and production of SWCNTs and MWCNTs 1 C 1,3 1,2
22. Growth mechanism of CNTs 1 C,D 2 1,2
23. Analysis of carbon nanotubes by X-ray diffraction 1 C,D 2 1,2
24. Analysis of carbon nanotubes by Raman Spectroscopy 1 C,D 3 1,2
60 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
25. Carbon nanotubes as Transistors: Field Effect Transistors
(FET) 1 C,D 3 1,2
26. Carbon nanotubes as bio-sensors and gas sensors, Carbon
nanotubes in dye degradation (photo-catalytic activities) 1 C,D 3 1,2
Unit IV: Graphene 8
27. Structure of graphene, synthesis, characterization 1 C 1,2,3 3,4
28. Electrical and magnetic properties of graphene 1 C 1,2,3 3,4
29. Band structure of graphene, phonons and Raman modes in
graphene 1 C 2,3 3,4
30. Layer dependence of Raman spectra, Raman spectroscopy
of graphene under strain 1 C 2,3 3,4
31. Infrared spectroscopy and X-Ray diffraction of graphene 1 C 2,3 3,4
32. EELS of graphene 1 C 2,3 3,4
33. Graphene in solar cell applications 1 C 2,3 3,4
34. Graphene as Gas sensors, Graphene in dye degradation
(Photo-catalytic activities) 1 C 2,3 3,4
Unit V: Carbon Thin Films 8
35. Carbon thin films introduction: amorphous and crystalline
nature 1 C 2,3,4 1,2
36. Chemical vapor deposition (CVD) diamond: structure and
synthesis 1 C 2,3,4 1,2
37. Physical and chemical properties of CVD diamond 1 C 2,3,4 1,2
38. CVD diamond as wear-resistant coating and bio-chemical
sensors 1 C 4 1,2
39. Optical applications: infrared windows, lenses, X-ray
windows 1 C 4 1,2
40. Amorphous carbon thin films: amorphous carbon films
(a:C) and hydrogenated amorphous carbon films (a:C-H) 1 C 4 1,2
41. Synthesis of amorphous carbon thin films 1 C 4 1,2
42.
Physical and chemical properties of amorphous carbon film
-Amorphous carbon film as anti-reflection and anti-
corrosive coatings
1 C 4 1,2
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1. Anke Krueger, “Carbon Materials and Nanotechnology”, Wiley-VCH , 2010
2. Yury Gogotsi, “Carbon Nanomaterials”, Taylor and Francis, Second edition, 2014
3. Reference Books/Other Reading Material
4. C. N. R. Rao, Ajay K. Sood, “Graphene: Synthesis, Properties, and Phenomena”- Wiley-VCH, 2013
5. Wonbong Choi, Jo-won Lee, “Graphene: Synthesis and Applications” CRC Press,Taylor and Francis, 2012
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
61 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT302E Physics of Solid State Devices L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanoelectronics
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To enable students to understand semiconductor physics and devices
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Enable students to understand the fundamental behavior of
semiconductors a
2. Understand and explain principles of semiconductor devices a e
3. Describe the impact of solid-state device capabilities and limitations
on electronic circuit performance a
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C/D/I/O IOs Reference
Unit I: Solid State Physics and Semiconductors 9
1. Introduction semiconductors 1 C 1 1-4
2. Geometry of crystals 1 C 1 1-4
3. Elements of quantum mechanics - solution of Schrodinger
equation 1 C 1,2 1-4
4. Energy bands - energy bands in 3D crystals-density of
states 1 C 1 1-4
5. Fermi-Dirac statistics 1 C 1 1,4
6. Charge - field, potential - donor/acceptor-equilibrium
statistics 1 C 1,2 1-3
7. Carrier concentration, Recombination –generation-
(Shockley-Read-Hall) SRH formula 1 C 1-3 1-3
8. Surface recombination transport 1 C 1,2 1-3
9. Hall measurement – drift-diffusion equation 1 C 1,2 1-4
Unit II: P-N Junctions 9
10. PN junctions - depletion region 1 C 2 1-3
11. PN junctions current - voltage characteristic 1 C 2 1-3
12. Junction breakdown - Zener and avalanche breakdown 1 C 1-3 1-3
13. Capacitance of p-n junctions -transient behavior 1 C 2 1-3
14. Zener diodes-tunnel diodes 1 C 2 1-3
15. Varactor diodes 1 C 2 1-3
16. Metal-semiconductor junctions: Schottky barriers 1 C 2,3 1-3
17. Rectifying contacts-Ohmic contacts 1 C 2 1-3
18. Typical Schottky barriers- heterojunctions 1 C 2 1-3
UNIT III: Bipolar Junction Transistors 8
19. Bipolar transistors-formation 1 C 1,2 1-4
20. Band structure 1 C 1,2 1-3
21. Theory of operation-NPN 1 C 1,2 1-3
22. PNP transistor action 1 C 1,2 1-3
23. Open circuited transistor- biasing in active region 1 C 1,2 1-3
24. Majority and minority carrier distribution 1 C 2,3 1-4
62 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
25. Terminal currents- amplification and switching 1 C 2,3 1-3
26. Schottky transistors, Photo transistors 1 C 1,2 1-3
Unit IV: Field Effect Transistors 8
27. Field effect transistors (FET) 1 C 1 1,2
28. Junction FET (JFET) 1 C 1 1,2
29. Theory of operation and current equation 1 C 1-3 1,2
30. Metal semiconductor FET (MESFET) 1 C 1-3 1-3
31. Metal oxide semiconductor FET (MOSFET)-working and
V-I characteristics 1 C 1-3 1-3
32. Depletion and enhancement types -threshold voltage -Gate
capacitance Inversion and accumulation layers 1 C 1-3 1-3
33. Complementary MOSFET (CMOSFET) 1 C 1-3 1-3
34. High electron mobility transistor (HEMT), charge coupled
devices 1 C 1-3 1-3
Unit V: Optoelectronic Devices 8
35. Photodiodes-current and voltage in an illuminated junction 1 C 1,2 1-3
36. Photodetectors-noise and bandwidth of photodetectors
37. Solar cells 1 C 2,3 1-3
38. Light emitting diodes, LED materials 1 C 2,3 1-3
39. Multilayer heterojunctions for LEDs 1 C 2,3 1-3
40. Lasers- semiconductor lasers 1 C 2,3 1-3
41. Population inversion at a junction. Emission spectra for p-n
junction lasers 1 C 2,3 1-3
42. Heterojunction lasers-materials for semiconductor lasers-
Semiconductor laser applications 1 C 1-3 1-3
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. Text Books
1 Streetman, Ben Garland, “Solid State Electronic Devices” Prentice Hall, 2000
2 S M Sze, Kwok k. Ng, “Physics of semiconductor devices” – John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2007
3 Reference Books/Other Reading Material
4 R. F. Pierret, "Semiconductor Device Fundamentals ", Pearson Education, Inc,1996
5 Charles Kittles, “Introduction to Solid State Physics”, Prentice Hall, 7th Edition., 2007
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
63 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT303E Molecular Spectroscopy and its Applications L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanoscience
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To introduce to the students the basic principles of spectroscopy and to lay emphasis on advanced
spectroscopic techniques and the fundamentals.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Acquire knowledge inthe basic concepts of atomic and molecular
spectra. a
2. Comprehend the principles of underlying spectra of atoms and
molecules.. a e
3. Apply the laws, concepts and principles in problem solving and new
formulations. a e
4. Emphasize the significance of various spectroscopic techniques a
5. Expose to concepts and applications of magnetic resonance. a
Session Description of Topic Contact hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Basics of Spectroscopy 9
1. Electromagnetic Radiation 1 C 1 1
2. Absorption and Emission of radiation 1 C 1 1
3. Line width and Line Broadening 1 C 1 1
4. Interpretation of Electron spin 1 C 1 1
5. Interpretation of Nuclear spin 1 C 1 1
6. Born-Oppenheimer approximation 1 C 1 1
7. Translational motion 1 C 1 1
8. Rotational motion 1 C 1 1
9. Vibrational motion 1 C 1 1
Unit II: Atomic Structure and Atomic Spectra 9
10. Structure and spectra of hydrogenic atoms 1
C 2 1,3
11. Atomic orbitals and their energies 1 C 1 1.4
12. Spectroscopic transitions and selection rules 1 C 1 1,4
13. Structures of many-electron atoms 1 C 1 1,4
14. Orbital approximation 1 C 2 1,3
15. Self consistent field orbitals 1 C 1 1
16. Spectra of complex atoms-singlet and triplet states 1 C,D 2 1,3
17. Spin orbit coupling 1 C 1 1
18. Impact on astrophysics: spectroscopy of stars
1 C 1 1
Unit III: Rotational Andvibrational
Spectroscopies
8
19. Pure rotation spectra 1 C 1 1
20. Rotational transitions 1 C 1 1
21. Rotational Raman spectra 1 C 1 1
22. Molecular vibrations 1 C 2 1
23. Vibration–rotation spectra 1 C 1 1,3
64 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
24. Vibrational Raman spectra of diatomicmolecules 1 C 3 1,3
25. Infrared absorption spectra of polyatomicmolecules 1 C 4 1,3
26. Vibrational Raman spectra of polyatomic molecules,
Symmetry aspects of molecular vibrations 1 C 4 1,3
Unit IV: Electronic Spectroscopy 8
27. The electronic spectra of diatomic molecules 1 C 1 1
28. Franck-Condon factors 1 C 1 1,3
29. The electronic spectra of polyatomic molecules 1 C 4 1
30. Circular dichorism spectroscopy 1 C 4 1
31. Fluorescence 1 C 4 1
32. Phosphorescence 1 C 4 1
33. Impact on biochemistry: fluorescence
Microscopy 1 C 3 1
34. Dissociation and predissociation, Principles of laser
action 1 C 4 1
Unit V: Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy 8
35. Effect of magnetic fields on electrons and nuclei 1 C 5 1,2
36. Energies of electrons in magnetic fields 1 C 5 1,5
37. Energies of nuclei in magnetic fields 1 C 4 1,5
38. Magnetic resonance spectroscopy 1 C 5 1,5
39. Nuclear magnetic resonance 1 C 5 1,5
40. NMR spectrometer 1 C 3 2
41. Chemical shift, Fine structure 1 C 5 1.5
42. Impact on medicine: magnetic resonance imaging
1 C 3 1
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books/ Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1. Peter Atkins, Julio de Paula Atkins, “Physical Chemistry”, W. H. Freeman and Company, New York, 2010
2. William W. Parson , “Modern Optical Spectroscopy” , Springer, New York, 2007
3. Collin Banwell, Mc Cash, “Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy”, McGraw Hill publishing, 2001
4. Harvey Elliot White,”Introduction to Atomic Spectra” McGraw Hill, 2001
5. Francis Rouessac and Annick Rouessac ,”Chemical Analysis-Modern Instrumentation Methods and
Techniques”, 2007
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
65 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT304E Nanotribology L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose This course provides the students about the engineering aspects of tribology which one can apply in
product development, failure analysis and condition monitoring.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the basic tribological concepts required for nanotechnology a
2. Identify, formulate, and solve engineering problem of interacting surfaces
in relative motion a e
3. Emphasize the knowledge of scientific disciplines in understanding
tribological phenomenon. d
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Introduction to Tribology 9
1. History of tribology, origin and Significance of
micro/nanotribology 1 C 1 1,3
2. Tribology in design, methods of solution of tribological problems 1 C 1,2 1,3
3. Purpose of lubrication, modes of lubrication- hydrodynamic ,
Hydrostatic 1 C 1,2 1,3
4. Boundary lubrication, elasto hydrodynamic lubrication, Extreme
pressure lubrication 1 C,D 2 1,3
5. Lubricants - types and lubricating oils 1 C 2 1,3
6. Lubricant properties-effect of temperature and pressure, oxidation
stability, thermal conductivity, type of additives 1 C 2 1,3
7. Bearings- classification based on mode of lubrication 1 C,D 2 1,3
8. Bearing-Classification based on relative motion between contact
surfaces 1 C,D 1,2 1,3
9. Comparison of sliding and rolling contact bearing, solving
numerical on above topic 1 C,B 1,2 1,3
Unit II: Surface Forces and Measuring Techniques 9
10. Methods used to study surface forces- force laws 1 C 1,2 2-4
11. Surface force apparatus (SFA) 1 C 1,2 2-4
12. Force between dry surface, force between surfaces in liquid 1 C,D 1,2 2-4
13. Adhesion and capillary forces, modes of deformation 1 C,D 1,3 2-4
14. Description of AFM/FFM and various measurement techniques 1 C 1,3 2-4
15. Surface roughness and friction force, Adhesion 1 C 1,3 2-4
16. Scratching ,wear and machining 1 C,D 1,3 2-4
17. Surface potential measurements 1 C 1,3 2-4
18. Nanoindentation measurement, boundary lubrication 1 C 1,3 2-4
Unit III: Lubrication, Friction and Wear 8 C 1,3 2-4
19. Lubricant States, viscosity of lubricant 1 C 2 1,3
20. Fluid film lubrication 1 C 2 1,3
21. Theories of hydrodynamics lubrication 1 C,D 2 1,3
22. Lubrication design of typical mechanical elements, transformation 1 C,D 2 1,3
66 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
23. Parameter of surface topography 1 C 2 1,3
24. Friction of materials, solid – solid contact 1 C,D 2 1,3
25. Liquid mediated contact, interfacing temperature of sliding
surfaces 1 C,D 2 1,3
26. Types of wear mechanism, Typical test geometries 1 C 2 1,3
Unit IV: Scale Effects in Mechanical Properties and Tribology 8
27. Nomenclature, scale effect in mechanical properties 1 C 1,2 2-4
28. Yield strength, shear strength 1 C 1.2 2-4
29. Scale effect on surface roughness and contact parameters 1 C 1,2 2-4
30. Scale effects in friction – adhesion 1 C 1,2 2-4
31. Two body deformation , Three body deformation 1 C 1,2 2-4
32. Ratchet mechanism, elastic to plastic regime 1 C 1,2 2-4
33. Tribological properties of SAMs, 1 C 1,2 2-5
34. Tailoring surfaces: Modifying surface composition and structure
for application in Tribology 1 C 1,2 2-5
Unit V: Applications of Tribology 8
35. Introduction to various tribological phenomenon 1 C 1-3 2,3
36. Bio-Tribology – Tribology in the human body, artificial organs 1 C 1-3 2,3
37. Tribology in medical devices 1 C 1-3 2,3
38. Natural human synovial joints and total joint replacements 1 C 1-3 2,3
39. Wind turbine Tribology, Biorefining 1 C 1-3 2,3
40. Coating application - sliding bearings, rolling contact 1 C 1-3 2,3
41. Bearings, gears, erosion and scratch resistant 1 C 1-3 2,3
42. Magnetic recording devices, Micro components, MEMS/NEMS 1 C 1-3 2,3
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Textbooks/ Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1. H.G. Phakatkar and R.R. Ghorpade, “Tribology”, Nirali publication, 2009
2. Bharat Bhushan, “Nanotribology and Nanomechanics”, Springer Publication, Second edition,2011
3. Bharat Bhushan,”Principles and Applications to Tribology”, Wiley Publication, 2013
4. C. Mathew Mate, “Tribology on the Small Scale” Oxford University Press, 2008
5. Nicholas D. Spencer, “Tailoring surfaces”, World Scientific IISC Press, 2011
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method – Theory Component
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
67 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT305E Nanotechnology Legal Aspects L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
The aim is to make the undergraduates familiar with the laws, regulations and intellectual property
rights in the field of nanotechnology and nanoscience. Also, the social implications of the
nanotechnology and its effect on the environment
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the Intellectual property rights c
2. Give a general introduction to government policies, regulations and
liability c f
3. Understand the effect of nanotechnology on the environment and
human health c h
4. Make the learner familiarize with risk associated to nanotechnology
and its societal implications c
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C/D/I/O IOs Reference
Unit I: Intellectual Property 9
1. Introduction, patents 1 C 1 1-5
2. Patentability requirements, structure of patent, utility patent 1 C 1,2 1-5
3. Design patent, monopoly powers, licensing strategies and
arrangements 1 C 1 1-5
4. Classification of patent applications, willful infringement
issues, claim scope 1 C 1 1-5
5. Reexamination of patents, patent treaties 1 C 1 1-5
6. Copyright laws – fixation, originality, creativity 1 C 1 1-5
7. Integrated circuit topographies, industrial designs, artistic
work – arrangement of atoms. 1 C 1 1-5
8. Technology transfer, trademarks 1 C 1,3 1-5
9. Trade secrets and ownership of IP 1 C 1,3 1-5
Unit II: Policy, Regulation and Liability
9
10. Government policies and rules 1 C 1,2 1-2
11. Quality of information, food and drugs evaluation and
research 1 C 1,2 1-2
12. Classification of medical products. safe workplace 1 C 1 1-2
13. Self regulation. liability – responsibility of a scientist 1 C 1 1-2
14. Civil and criminal laws in nanotechnology 1 C 1,2 1-2
15. Negligence to nanotechnology – breach of duty causation,
damage and defense 1 C 1,2 1-2
16. Liability for nanoparticles 1 C 1,2 1-2
17. Risk associated with nanoparticles 1 C 1,2 1-2
18. Class action and certification 1 C 1,2 1-2
Unit III: Nanotechnology and the Environment 8
19. Current environmental regulations 1 C 1,3 1-3
20. Classification and sources of pollutants 1 C 1,3 1-3
68 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
21. Pollution – air, water 1 C 3 1-3
22. Industrial waste water, control, quality 1 C 3 1-3
23. Dispersion methods, monitoring 1 C 1,3 1-3
24. Solid waste – industrial 1 C 3 1-3
25. Hospital and hazardous waste 1 C 3 1-3
26. Toxicity, health and safety issues, Health risk assessment 1 C 1,3 1-3
Unit IV: Nanotechnology: Ethical and Social
Implications 8
27. Socio – economic impact of nanotechnology 1 C 1,4 1,2
28. Implications of nanotechnology for the quality of life 1 C 1,4 1,2
29. Short and long term implications 1 C 1,4 1-2
30. Ethical issues in nanotechnology 1 C 1,4 1-2
31. Ethics for artificial intellects 1 C 1,4 1-2
32. Nanotechnology and life extension 1 C 1,4 1-2
33. Nanotechnology for national security and space exploration 1 C 1,4 1-2
34. Public perception of nano-technological risk, Education and
training public 1 C 1,4 1-2
Unit V: Other Legal Issues 8
35. Trade restrictions 1 C 1,2 1-2
36. Taxation of goods too small to be seen 1 C 1,2 1-2
37. Laws for genetic research and rights of new life form 1 C 1,2 1-2
38. Government surveillance, privacy violations 1 C 1,2 1-2
39. Security and eavesdropping 1 C 1,2 1-2
40. R&D regulation 1 C 1,2 1-2
41. Change in industrial design laws 1 C 1,2 1-2
42. Export – import regulations, Crimes using nanoparticles,
corporate criminal liability, prevention and detention 1 C 1,2 1-2
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. Text Books
1. Patrick M. Boucher, “Nanotechnology: Legal aspects” CRC press, 2008
2. Fritz Allhoff, Patrick Lin, James Moor, John Weckert, “Nanoethics: The ethical and social implications of
nanotechnology” Wiley publication, 2007
3. Reference Books/Other Reading Material
4. Louis Theodore, Robert G. Kunz, “Nanotechnology: Environmental implications and solutions” Wiley
Publication, 2005
5. John C. Miller, Ruben Serrato, Jose F. R. C, Griffith Kundahl, “The handbook of Nanotechnology:
Business, policy, and intellectual property law” Wiley Publication, 2005
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
69 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT306E Lithographic Techniques and Fabrication L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanofabrication
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting –2016
Purpose To acquire adequate knowledge about various lithography tools for micro/nano fabrication for
micro/nanoelectronics, micro/nano fluidics and MEMS/NEMS.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to a
1. Acquire basic understanding of lithography tools for top-down
micro/nano fabrication a
2. Understand the need for various lithography tools a e
3. Gain knowledge about direct write lithography tools and their
merits and demerits a e
4. Identify lithography tools and process flow for specific device
applications a e
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Introduction 9
1. Introduction- micro/nano fabrication 1 C 1 1-6
2. Top-down approach, bottom-up approach 1 C 1 1,2
3. Clean room, types of clean room, necessity, construction and
maintenance of clean room 1 C 1 1,2
4. Clean room standards, protocols 1 C 1 1,2
5. Lithography- process steps, photo resists 1 C,D 1 1,2
6. Spin coating, exposure, chemical development, optimization 1 C 1 1,2
7. Etching methods: dry and wet methods 1 C 1 1,2
8. Types of lithography-differences 1 C 1,2 1,3,4,6
9. Replication tools, next generation lithography tools 1 C 1,2 1,3,4,6
Unit II: Masked lithography (optical and X-ray) 9
10. Optical(photo) lithography, optical lithography mask 1 C 2 2,5,6
11. Different light sources, contact and proximity exposures 1 C,D 2 2,5,6
12. Diffraction limit and resolutions enhancement methods 1 C,D 2 2,5,6
13. Projection lithography, EUV lithography 1 C,D 2 2,5,6
14. Dose calculation, interferometric and holographic tools 1 C,D 2 2,5,6
15. Lithography masks, laser writer 1 C, D 2 2,5,6
16. Synchrotron radiation for lithography processes 1 C 2 2,5,6
17. X-ray lithography mask, merits and demerits 1 C,D 2,3 2,5,6
18. Comparison of all masked lithography tools and various
applications 1 C,D 2,3 2,5,6
Unit III: Direct lithography- electron beam lithography
(EBL) 8
19. Introduction-maskless lithography 1 C 2,3 1,5,6
20. Difference between masked and maskless, advantages and
disadvantages 1 C 2,3 1,5,6
21. Principles of electron beam lithography system, electron
properties 1 C,D 2,3 1,5,6
22. Design of electron beam lithography system 1 C 2,3 1,5,6
70 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
23. Operation of electron beam lithography system 1 C 2,3 1,5,6
24. E-beam resists, resist properties, comparison with optical
lithography resists 1 C 2,3 1,5,6
25. Dose calculation, beam scanning 1 C,D 2,3 1,5,6
26. Nanofabrication with EBL – NEMS applications,
Nanofabrication with EBL – Nanofluidics applications 1 D 2,3 1,5,6
Unit IV: Direct Lithography-Using Ion Beams 8
27. Ion beam lithography (IBL) types 1 C 3 1,2,5
28. Focused ion beam properties 1 C 3 1,2,5
29. Beam scanning, resists for ion beam lithography, process flow 1 C,D 3 1,2,5
30. Focused ion beam lithography- Incident ion properties 1 C 3 1,2,5
31. Principle, design and operation 1 C 3 1,2,5
32. Masked ion beam structuring: Broad beam patterning 1 C 3 1,2,5
33. Atom lithography, applications-Ion beam lithography 1 C,D 3 1,2,5
34. Nanofabrication with IBL – NEMS applications ,
Nanofabrication with IBL – Nanofluidics applications 1 D 3 1,2,5
Unit V: Nanoimprint Lithography and other Replication
Tools 8
35. Micro/ Nano replication tools 1 C,D 2,3,4 1,4,7
36. Necessity, application areas-MEMS/NEMS, micro/nano
fluidics 1 C 2,3,4 1,4,7
37. Soft lithography 1 C 2,3,4 1,4,7
38. PDMS Casting, hot embossing 1 C,D 2,3,4 1,4,7
39. Micro injection molding and nano imprinting 1 C 2,3,4 1,4,7
40. Replication tools- principle 1 C, D 2,3,4 1,4,7
41. Process flow and requirements 1 C 2,3,4 1,4,7
42. Polymers for imprinting, characteristics and performance,
Master mold preparation for replication tools 1 C, D 2,3,4 1,4,7
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1. Stefan Landis, “Nano Lithography”, Wiley, 2011
2. David G. Bucknall , “ Nanolithography and Patterning techniques in microelectronics”, CRC Press, 2005
3. Reference Books/Other Reading Material
4. Chris A. Mack, Fundamental Principles of Optical Lithography: The Science of Microfabrication, John
Wiley & Sons, London 2007
5. P. Rai Choudhury, Handbook of Microlithography, Micromachining, and Microfabrication: SPIE Press,
1997 - Technology & Engineering
6. Cabrini, Satoshi Kawata, “ Nanofabrication Handbook” CRC Press, Taylor and Francis, 2012
7. Harry J. Levinson, W. R. Fahrner, “Principles of Lithography”, International Society for Optical
Engineering, 2005
8. Stefan Landis, “Lithography and nanolithography”, Published by Wiley - ISTE, 2010
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
71 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT307E Smart Sensor Systems L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanomaterials
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To provide a working knowledge of the foundations and techniques in smart sensor systems.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
6. Comprehend the principles behind sensors a c
7. Appreciate and understand the applications of sensors a c d
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Sensor Characteristics and Physical Principles of
Sensing 9
1. Sensors classifications 1 C 1,2 1-3
2. Measurands 1 C 1,2 1-3
3. Characterization 1 C 1,2 1-3
4. Smart sensor systems 1 C 1,2 1-3
5. Physical principles of sensing: electric charges, fields, and
potentials 1 C 1,2 1-3
6. Capacitance, magnetism 1 C 1,2 1-3
7. Induction, resistance 1 C 1,2 1-3
8. Piezoelectric effect, pyroelectric effect 1 C 1,2 1-3
9. Hall effect, Seebeck and Peltier effects 1 C 1,2 1-3
Unit II: Acoustic Sensors , Magnetic Sensors and Mechanical
Sensors 9
10. Acoustic waves, piezoelectric materials 1 C 1,2 1-3
11. Acoustic sensing, saw sensors 1 C 1,2 1-3
12. Sensor applications and future trends 1 C 1,2 1-3
13. Magnetic sensors: effects and materials 1 C 1,2 1-3
14. Integrated Hall sensors 1 C 1,2 1-3
15. Magnetotransistors, other magnetics transistor and future trends 1 C 1,2 1-3
16. Mechanical sensors: piezoresistivity 1 C 1,2 1-3
17. Piezoresistive sensors 1 C 1,2 1-3
18. Capacitive sensors 1 C 1,2 1-3
Unit III: Radiation Sensors Thermal Sensors and Chemical
Sensors 8
19. Radiation basics 1 C 1,2 1-3
20. HgCdTe infrared sensors 1 C 1,2 1-3
21. Visible-light color sensors, high-energy photodiodes 1 C 1,2 1-3
22. Heat transfer, thermal structures 1 C 1,2 1-3
23. Thermal-sensing elements 1 C 1,2 1-3
24. Thermal and temperature sensors 1 C 1,2 1-3
25. Interaction of gaseous species at semiconductor
Surfaces 1 C 1,2 1-3
26. Catalysis, the acceleration of chemical reactions, Thin-film sensors, 1 C 1,2 1-3
72 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
FET devices for gas and ion sensing
Unit IV: Biosensors, Electronic Interface and Integrated
Sensors 8
27. Immobilization of biological elements 1 C 1,2 1-4
28. Transduction principles 1 C 1,2 1-4
29. Lab-on-chip sensors 1 C 1,2 1-4
30. Integrated sensors: system organization and functions 1 C 1,2 1-4
31. Interface electronics 1 C 1,2 1-4
32. Universal transducer interface 1 C 1,2 1-4
33. Microtechnologies: introduction to microsystems engineering 1 C 1,2 1-4
34. Systems development: methods and tools, constructive and
connective techniques 1 C 1,2 1-4
Unit V: Micro-and Nanotechnologies or Sensors 8
35. Fundamentals of MEMS fabrication: introduction and description of
basic processes 1 C 1,2 1-4
36. MEMS fabrication technologies: bulk micromachining 1 C 1,2 1-4
37. Surface micromachining 1 C 1,2 1-4
38. High-aspect-ratio (LIGA and LIGA-Like) technology microfluitics
microsystem components 1 C 1,2 1-4
39. Microfluidics microsystem components 1 C 1,2 1-4
40. Nanotechnology: product prospects - application trends 1 C 1,2 1-4
41. Procedures and techniques: the making of ultrathin films 1 C 1,2 1-4
42. Creation of lateral nanostructures, clusters and nanocrystalline
materials and principles of self-organization and Future trends 1 C 1,2 1-4
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. text books/reference books/other reading material
1. Jacob Fraden, “Handbook of Modern Sensors: Physics, Designs, and Applications”, Springer; 4th ed. 2010
2. S. M. Sze, “Semiconductor Sensors”, Wiley-Interscience,1994
3. Gerard Meijer, “Smart sensor systems”, Wiley, 2008
4. W Gopel, J. Hesse, J. N. Zemel, “Sensors A Comprehensive Survey” Vol. 9, Wiley-VCH, 1995
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
73 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT308E 2-D Layered Nanomaterials L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanomaterials
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
The first experimental discovery of 2-D layered materials "Graphene", having unique properties triggered
a great deal of attention toward 2-D layered structures. These boost the research in the area of Nanoscience
and Nanotechnology to search other carbon and non-carbon-based 2-D layered nanomaterials. This course
provides an overview of this new field "2-D layered Nanomaterials"
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Explain electronic properties of 2D materials, especially Graphene a
2. Explain the different method and can have good basic knowledge a c
3. Describe the difference in various properties due to 2D-layered structure a
4. Describe various type and application of 2D Nanomaterials a
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Introduction to 2D Layered Materials 9
1. Rise of graphene 1 C 1,2 1,2
2. Atomic structure of 2D-graphene 1 C 1,2 1,2
3. Theory of 2D-materials; reality 1 C 1 1,2
4. Free standing 2D-materials 1 C 1 1,2
5. Electronic structure of graphene: band structure 1 C 1 1,2
6. Density of states of graphene 1 C,D 1 1,2
7. Role of defect and dopant on electronic structure of graphene 1 C,D 1 1,2
8. An overview on physical properties of graphene 1 C 1 1,2
9. An overview on chemical properties of graphene 1 C 1 1,2
Unit II: Synthesis Methods and Raman Shift 9
10. Scotch-tape method (micromechanical cleavage) 1 C 1,2 1,2
11. Chemical vapor deposition 1 C 1,2 1,2
12. Solution-exfoliation – graphene 1 C 1,2 1,2
13. Solution-exfoliation –other 2-D materials 1 C 1,2 1,2
14. Decomposition of silicon carbide 1 C 1,2 1,2
15. Principles of Raman spectroscopy 1 C 1,2 1,2
16. Raman spectrum of graphene 1 C 1,2 1,2
17. Analysis of graphene Raman spectra; D and G band 1 C 1,2 1,2
18. Raman shift dependence on number of layer, defect, dopant etc. 1 C 1,2 1,2
Unit III: Chemical and Physical Properties of 2D Layered
Materials 8
19. X-ray photoemission spectroscopy 1 C,D 1,2,3 1,2
20. X-ray diffraction study 1 C,D 1,2,3 1,2
21. Optical absorption spectroscopy 1 C,D 3,4 1,2
22. Measuring mechanical properties 1 C 3,4 1,2
23. Adsorption properties 1 C 3,4 1,2
24. Magnetic properties, Catalytic Properties 1 C,D 3,4 1,2
25. Metal support interactions: changes the properties 1 C 3,4 1,2
74 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
26. Non-metal support interactions: changes the properties 1 C 3,4 1,2
Unit IV: Beyond Graphene 8
27. Graphene, Penta-graphene 1 C,D 4 3,4,5,6,7
28. h-BN based 2-D layered nanomaterials 1 C,D 4 3,4,5,6,7,8
29. SiC based 2-D layered nanomaterials 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7,8
30. Si, Ge based 2-D layered nanomaterials 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7,8
31. Oxide based 2-D layered materials 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7,8
32. Transition metal dichalcogenides based 2-D layered
nanomaterials; MoS2 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7,8
33. VS2, WS2 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7,8
34. New Materials Ex: Si2BN, BCN 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7,8
Unit V: Applications of 2D-Nanomaterials 8
35. Gas sensors 1 C 4 3,4,8
36. Chemical sensors, Use as smart materials 1 C 4 5,6,7,8
37. 2D materials based membranes 1 C 4 5,6,7,8
38. Oxygen reduction reaction: 2D materials enhance the activity 1 C,D 4 5,6,7,8
39. Hydrogen production 1 C 4 5,6,7,8
40. Electronic devices 1 C 4 5,6,7,8
41. Optical materials, solar absorber materials 1 C 4 5,6,7,8
42. Magnetic devices 1 C 4 5,6,7,8
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1. Christoph A. Schalley, “Analytical Methods in Supramolecular Chemistry”, Wiley-Vch Verlag, Berlin, 2012
2. Paolo Samorí, Franco Cacialli (Editor), “Functional Supramolecular Architectures”, 2nd Volume Set, Wiley-
VchVerlag, Berlin, 2010
3. Donald A. Tomalia, Jørn B. Christensen, Ulrik Boas, “Dendrimers, Dendrons, and Dendritic Polymers:
Discovery, Applications and the Future”, MPG books group, UK, 2012
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
4. M. Houssa, A. Dimoulas, A.Molle, “2D Materials for Nanoelectronics”, CRC Press, ISBN 9781498704175-
CAT# K24702 Series: Series in Materials Science and Engineering, 2016
5. O. Frank, M. S. Dresselhaus, M.Kalbac, Raman Spectroscopy and in Situ Raman Spectroelectrochemistry of
Isotopically Engineered Graphene Systems, Acc. Chem. Res., 2015, 48, 111–118
6. M. Naguib and Y.Gogotsi, Synthesis of Two-Dimensional Materials by Selective Extraction, Acc. Chem.
Res., 2015, 48, 128–135
7.
Renzhi Ma and Takayoshi Sasaki, Two-Dimensional Oxide and Hydroxide Nanosheets: Controllable High-
Quality Exfoliation, Molecular Assembly, and Exploration of Functionality, Acc. Chem. Res., 2015, 48, 136–
143
8. J-O Joswig, T. Lorenz, T. Berhane W. S. Gemming, G. Seifert, Optics, Mechanics, and Energetics of Two-
Dimensional MoS2 Nanostructures from a Theoretical Perspective, Acc. Chem. Res., 2015, 48, 48–55
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
75 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT309E Supramolecular Systems L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Departmentelective Nanoscience
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
To acquire the concepts of supramolecular chemistry and nanoscience are utilized in the design of new
materials. The course provides a short overview of main aspects of nanostructured objects, from the
smallest host-guest complexes to sophisticated molecular devices and infinite multicomponent systems.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1
Gain insight in supramolecular structures and their functionalized associates
ability to provide the true assessment of contemporary knowledge of macro-
molecular studies
a d
2 Apply through feasible approaches, and assemble with the prior knowledge to
fabricate novel designs/architectures b
3
Evaluate the needs of sustainable future, develop the supramolecular
molecular materials for biological systems and know the roles/functions of
such interdisciplinary fields
c
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Supramolecular Chemistry 9
1. Definition and development of supramolecular
chemistry 1 C 1-3 1
2. Classification of supramolecular host-guest compounds 1 C 1 1
3. Receptors, coordination and the lock and key analogy 1 C 1 1
4. Binding constants 1 C 1 1
5. Cooperative and chelate effect 1 C 1 1
6. Thermodynamic and kinetic selectivity and
discriminations 1 C 1 1
7. Nature of supramolecular interactions 1 C 1 1
8. Solvation and hydrophobic effects 1 C 1 1
9. Supramolecular concepts and design 1 C,D 1 1
a. Unit II: Host-Guest Chemistry 9
10. Hosts for cation binding 1 C 1,2 1
11. Introduction to coordination chemistry 1 C 1,2 1
12. The crown ethers and lariat ethers 1 C 1,2 1
13. The cryptands and spherands 1 C 1,2 1
14. Host for anion binding 1 C 1,2 1
15. Concepts in anion host design 1 C,D 1,2 1
16. From cation host to anion host – a simple change in pH 1 C 1,2 1
17. Hosts for binding of neutral guests 1 C 1,2 1
18. Inert metal- containing receptors 1 C 1,2 1
a. Unit III: The Supramolecular Chemistry of Life 8
19. Biological inspiration for supramolecular chemistry 1 C 2,3 1
20. Alkali metal cations in biochemistry 1 C 2,3 1
21. Porphyrins and tetrapyrrole macrocyles 1 C 2,3 1
22. Supramolecular features of plant photosynthesis 1 C 2,3 1
76 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
23. Uptake and transport of oxygen by haemoglobin 1 C 2,3 1
24. Enzymes and coenzymes 1 C 2,3 1
25. Neurotransmitters and hormones 1 C 2,3 1
26. Semiochemistry in natural world, Biochemical self-
assembly 1 C 2,3 1
a. Unit IV: Methods of Supramolecular Systems and
Characterization Techniques 8
27. The extraction technique, the extraction equilibrium 1 C 2 2
28. Principles of supramolecular Extraction 1 C 2 2
29. Examples of supramolecular extraction , binding Constant 1 C 2 2
30. Binding constant determination by UV/Vis spectroscopy 1 C 2 2
31. Instrumentation of mass spectrometry, Limitations of
mass spectrometry 1 C 2 2
32. Scanning probe microscopes: - scanning electron
microscopy 1 C 2 2
33. Transmission electron microscopy 1 C 2 2
34. Confocal laser scanning microscopy 1 C 2 2
a. Unit V: Special Class Materials 8
35. Birth of a new macromolecular chemistry concept 1 C 2,3 3
36. The past, present and future of dendrimers and dendrons 1 C 2,3 3,4
37. Supramolecular assembly of dendrons and dendrimers 1 C 2,3 3,4
38. Synthesis of dendritic polymers 1 C 2,3 3,4
39. Characterization of dendritic architectural structures 1 C 2,3 3,4
40. Nanomedical and advanced materials 1 C 2,3 3,4
41. Diagnostics and advanced imaging 1 C 2,3 3,4
42. Dendrimer based nanopharmaceuticals, Dendrimer
applications and products 1 C 2,3 3,4
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1. Jonathan W. Steed and Jerry L. Atwood, “Supramolecular Chemistry”J. Wiley and Sons; 1stEd. 2000
2. Christoph A. Schalley, “Analytical Methods in Supramolecular Chemistry”, Wiley-VchVerlag, Berlin 2012
3. Donald A. Tomalia, Jørn B. Christensen, Ulrik Boas, “Dendrimers, Dendrons, and Dendritic Polymers:
Discovery, Applications and the Future”, MPG books group, UK, 2012
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
4. Helena Dodziuk, “Introduction to Supramolecular Chemistry”, Kluwer Academic publishers, 2002
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
77 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT310E MEMS and NEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanofabrication
Course designed by Department of Physics Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting --, 2016
Purpose To provide an adequate knowledge basic knowledge on MEMS and NEMS
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Acquire the basics of design and fabrication techniques in
MEMS and NEMS a c
2. Gain the basic understanding of modeling and different types
of MEMS a c
3. Apply in various applications a d
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Introduction to MEMS and NEMS 9
1. MEMS and NEMS 1 C 1,3 1,2
2. Micro- and Nanoelectromechanical Systems: Scaling Laws 1 C 1,3 1,2
3. Mathematical Modeling 1 C 1,3 1,2
4. Microsensors and microactuators 1 C 1,3 1,2
5. Mechanical MEMS, Thermal MEMS 1 C 1,3 1,2
6. MOEMS, Magnetic MEMS, RF MEMS 1 C 1,3 1,2
7. Microfluidic systems, Bio-Chemo devices 1 C 1,3 1,2
8. MEMS Architectures 1 C 1,3 1,2
9. NEMS Architectures 1 C 1,3 1,2
Unit II: Micromachining and System Modeling 9
10. Photolithography, structural and sacrificial materials 1 C,D 1,3 1,2
11. Thin film deposition 1 C 1,3 1,2
12. Impurity doping, etching 1 C 1,3 1,2
13. Bulk and surface micromachining 1 C 1,3 1,2
14. Wafer bonding and LIGA 1 C 1,3 1,2
15. MEMS Assembling and Packaging 1 C 1,3 1,2
16. Basic Modeling elements in mechanical, electrical systems 1 C,D 1,3 1,2
17. Basic Modeling elements in fluid systems, thermal systems 1 C,D 1,3 1,2
18. Translational and rotational pure mechanical systems 1 C 1,3 1,2
Unit III: Mechanical and Thermal MEMS 8
19. Principles of sensing and actuation 1 C 1,3 1,2
20. Components: beam, cantilever, microplates 1 C 1,3 1,2
21. Components: capacitive effects, piezo element 1 C 1,3 1,2
22. Measurements: strain pressure, flow 1 C 1,3 1,2
23. MEMS Gyroscopes: shear mode 1 C 1,3 1,2
24. MEMS Gyroscopes: gripping piezo actuators 1 C 1,3 1,2
25. Thermal sensors and actuators: thermal basics 1 C 1,3 1,2
26. Thermodevices, Thermal actuators, Bistable MEMS relays 1 C 1,3 1,2
78 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Unit IV: Magnetic and RF MEMS 8
27. Magnetic materials: properties 1 C 1,3 1,2
28. Magnetic materials for MEMS 1 C 1,3 1,2
29. Magneto resistive sensor 1 C 1,3 1,2
30. MEMS magnetic sensors and actuators 1 C 1,3 1,2
31. Review of RF based communication system-I 1 C 1,3 1,2
32. Review of RF based communication system-II 1 C 1,3 1,2
33. RF MEMS, varactors, tuner/filter 1 C 1,3 1,2
34. Resonators, Switches, Phase shifter 1 C 1,3 1,2
Unit V: MOEMS and Microfluidic Systems 8
35. Principles of MOEMS technology 1 C 1,3 1,2
36. Applications 1 C 1,3 1,2
37. Light modulators , beam splitters 1 C 1,3 1,2
38. Micro lens, micro mirror, digital micromirror device 1 C 1,3 1,2
39. Optical switch, wave guide and tuning 1 C 1,3 1,2
40. Properties of fluids, fluid actuation methods 1 C 1,3 1,2
41. Dilectrophoresis, electrothermal flow, thermo capillary
effect 1 C 1,3 1,2
42. Micropumps, Micropumps: design consideration 1 C 1,3 1,2
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books/Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1. Mahalik N P, “MEMS”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2008
2. Sergey Edward Lyshevski, “Micro-Electro Mechanical and Nano-Electro Mechanical Systems, Fundamental
of Nano-and Micro-Engineering”, CRC Press, 2005
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
79 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT311E Surface and Interfaces L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanoscience
Course designed by Department of physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose The purpose of this course is to provide a basic understanding on surface science of Nanomaterials
related with their properties
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Acquire the basic knowledge on surface science of nanomaterials a
2. Understand the various mechanisms involved in bonding of
molecules at surfaces a e
3. Enhance the knowledge on analysis and problem solving methods
using various analytical techniques. a e
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Introduction to Surface and Interfaces 9
1. Introduction to surfaces and interfaces - surface energy
and surface states, surface tension 1 C 1, 2 1-4
2. Some basic concepts of bulk crystallography : lattices,
directions and planes 1 C 1 2,3,4
3. Structure of the unit cell and concept of ideal crystal
and surface 1 C 1 2,3,4
4. Surface structure and surface order, surface
crystallography 1 C 1 2,3,4
5. Crystallography of a plane, point and space group
symmetry 1 C 1 2,3,4
6. Unit mesh transformation – wood notation 1 C 1 2,3,4
7. Unit mesh transformation – matrix notation and
classification of overlayer meshes 1 C 1 2,3,4
8. Electronic structure (for three dimension) 1 C 1-3 2,3,4
9. Surface states and Surface electronic structure (for two
dimension) 1 C 1-3 2,3,4
Unit II: Adsorption and Desorption 9
10. Adsorption and desorption and its types 1 C 2 2, 4
11. Basics of adsorption kinetics and concept of coverage
dependence 1 C 2 2, 4
12. Coverage dependence derivation 1 C 2 2, 4
13. Temperature dependence 1 C 2 2, 4
14. Angular and kinetic energy dependence 1 C 2 2, 4
15. Thermal deposition and desorption kinetics 1 C,D 2, 3 1,2,4,5
16. Thermal desorption spectroscopy 1 C 2, 3 1,2,4,5
17. Adsorption Isotherms 1 C,D 2 2,4
18. A detailed study and Non-Thermal desorption 1 C 2 2,4
Unit III: Surface Diffusion 8
19. Basic equations -random-walk motion 1 C 1 2,4
20. Basic equations -random-Fick’s laws 1 C 1 2,4
21. Tracer and chemical, diffusion 1 C 1 2,4
80 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
22. Intrinsic and mass transfer diffusion 1 C 1 2,4
23. Anisotropy of surface diffusion 1 C 1 2,4
24. Atomistic mechanisms of surface diffusion: hopping
mechanism 1 C 1, 2 2, 4
25. Vacancy mechanism, atomic exchange mechanism 1 C 1, 2 2, 4
26. Tunneling mechanism, Experimental study of surface
diffusion 1 C 1, 2 2, 4
Unit IV: Surface Analysis, Electron Spectroscopy
Methods 8
27. Surface specificity – spectrum of secondary electrons 1 C 1,2 1, 2, 4, 5
28.
Photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS and UPS) – physical
process: photoemission, spectral feature and depth
specificity
1 C 2, 3 1, 2, 4, 5
29.
Photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS and UPS) -
compositional information, elemental sensitivity,
chemical-state information, spectral resolution and
depth profiling
1 C 2, 3 1, 2, 4, 5
30. Modular instrumentation: excitation sources, energy
analyzers and detectors 1 C 2, 3 1, 2, 4, 5
31.
Auger Electron spectroscopy (AES) and ion scattering
spectroscopy (ISS): physical process: photoemission,
spectral feature and depth Specificity
1 C 2, 3 1, 2, 4, 5
32. AES and ISS: compositional information, elemental
sensitivity 1 C 2, 3 1, 2, 4, 5
33. AES and ISS: chemical-state information, spectral
resolution and depth profiling 1 C 2, 3 1, 2, 4, 5
34. AES and ISS: excitation sources, energy analyzers and
detectors 1 C 2, 3 1, 2, 4, 5
Unit V: Nanoscale Characterization of Surface and
Interfaces 8
35. Scanning tunneling microscopy (STM) – historical
perspective and theory 1 C 3 1, 5
36. STM: electron tunneling and STM imaging 1 C 3 1, 5
37. Scanning tunneling spectroscopy and instrumentation 1 C 3 1, 5
38. Semiconductor surfaces, Si (111), Si (100) & GaAs
(110) 1 C 3 1, 5
39. Photoinduced process 1 C 3 1, 5
40. Metal – semiconductor surfaces 1 C 2 1, 5
41. Alkali – metal – semiconductor interfaces 1 C 2 1, 5
42. Growth of trivalent metals on Si (001) 1 C 2 1, 5
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. Text Books
1. John DiNardo N., “Nanoscale Characterization Of Surface And Interfaces”, Wiley-VCH, 2008
2. Oura K., V. G. Lifshits, A. A. Saranin, A. V. Zotov and M. Katayama, “Surface Science – An Introduction”
Springer, 2013
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
3. Unertl W.N., “Physical structure” Elsevier Science B. V, 2006
4. Charles Kittel, “Introduction to solid state physics”, John Wiley publications, 2005
5. Riviere J.C and Myhra S., “Handbook of Surface and Interface analysis”, CRC Press, 2009
81 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III
Surprise
Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
82 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT312E Nanotechnology in Agriculture and Food Processing L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanobiotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
The course puts together several advanced concepts and topics in an important application of
nanotechnology. Students are expected to develop comprehension of the subject and to gain scientific
understanding regarding the role of nanotechnology in the modern agricultural trend and food
processing
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand about the interactions at molecular scale a
2. Understand the effect of nanoparticles on agricultural methodology
and food technology d
3. Gain knowledge of the types diagnostic tools using nanotechnology c
4. Get familiarized with the new concepts of Nano Science in the
packaging industries and food production d
5. Know the toxic effect of nanomaterials used in food processing and
food technology d
Session
Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Intermolecular Interactions and Supramolecular
Structures 9
1. Water - hydrophobic and hydrophilic interactions - dispersion
interaction - electrostatic interactions 1 C 1 1,2,3
2. Atoms and small molecules - polymers, particles, and surfaces 1 C 1 1,2
3. Steric interactions involving soluble polymers 1 C 1 1,2,3
4. Depletion aggregation of particles by non-adsorbing polymers 1 C 1 1,2,3
5. Bridging aggregation of particles by adsorbing polymers 1 C 1 1,2,3
6. Stabilization of dispersed particles by adsorbing polymers 1 C 1 1,2,3
7. Polymer brushes to prevent particle aggregation and particle
deposition at surfaces 1 C 1 1,2,3
8. Organized self-assembled structures - Langmuir layers 1 C 1 1,2,3
9. Lipid bilayers - solid-supported lipid bilayers 1 C 1 1,2,3
Unit II: Nanoparticles in Agricultural and Food Diagnostics 9
10. Enzyme biosensors and diagnostics 1 C 2,3 2,4
11. DNA-based biosensors and diagnostics 1 C 2,3 2,4
12. Radiofrequency identification 1 C 2,3 2,4
13. Integrated nanosensor networks: detection and response 1 C 2,3 2,4
14. Lateral flow (immuno) assay 1 C 2,3 2
15. Nucleic acid lateral flow (immuno) assay 1 C 2,3 2
16. Flow-through (immuno) assays 1 C 2,3 2
17. Antibody microarrays 1 C 2,3 2
18. Surface plasmon resonance spectroscopy 1 C 2,3 2,4
Unit III: Nanotechnology in Food Production 8
19. Food and new ways of food production 1 C 4 2
20. Concerns about using nanotechnology in food production 1 C 4 2
83 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
21. Efficient fractionation of crops - efficient product structuring 1 C 4 2
22. Applications of nanotechnology in foods 1 C 4 2
23. Sensing, packaging, encapsulation 1 C 4 2
24. Engineering food ingredients to improve bioavailability 1 C 4 2
25. Nanocrystalline food ingredients - nano-emulsions 1 C 4 2
26. Nano-engineered protein fibrils as ingredient building blocks,
Preparation of food matrices 1 C 4 2
Unit IV: Nanotechnology in Food Production 8
27. Crop improvement - reasons to package food products 1 C 2,4 2
28. Physical properties of packaging materials - strength 1 C 2,4 2
29. Barrier properties light absorption - structuring of interior surfaces 1 C 2,4 2
30. Antimicrobial functionality 1 C 2,4 2
31. Visual indicators 1 C 2,4 2
32. Quality assessment - food safety indication 1 C 2,4 2
33. Product properties - information and communication technology 1 C 2,4 2
34. Sensors - radiofrequency identification technology, Risks -
consumer and societal acceptance 1 C 2,4 2
Unit V: Toxicology of Nanomaterials in Food 8
35. Characterization of engineered nanomaterials 1 C 2,4,5 2
36. Unique issues for characterization of engineered nanomaterials for
food applications 1 C 2,4,5 2
37. Safety assessment of oral-exposure engineered nanomaterials for
food application 1 C 2,4,5 2
38. Experimental design considerations for toxicology studies 1 C 2,4,5 2
39. Toxicokinetics 1 C 2,4,5 2
40. Adme (absorption, distribution, metabolism, and excretion) 1 C 2,4,5 2
41. Toxicodynamics 1 C 2,4,5 2
42. In vivo toxicity & In vitro toxicity - study reliability 1 C 2,4,5 2
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books/ Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1. Nicholas A. Kotov, “Nanoparticle Assemblies and Superstructures”, CRC, 2006
2. Lynn J. Frewer, Willem Norde, Arnout Fischer, and FransKampers,”Nanotechnology in the Agri-Food
Sector”, Wiley VCH, 2011
3. David S Goodsell, “Bionanotechnology”, John Wiley & Sons, 2004
4. Jennifer Kuzma and Peter VerHage, “Nanotechnology in agriculture and food production”, Woodrow
Wilson International, 2006
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
84 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT313E Advanced Drug Delivery Systems L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanobiotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics & Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
The goal of this course is to provide an insight into the advances in the drug deliverance and also to
guide the students to understand how nanomaterials can be used for a diversity of carriers, therapeutic
and diagnostic rationales.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Device and develop novel drug carriers with advantages over
conventional therapeutics a
2. Understand the effect of varied nanoparticles as drug delivery systems d
3. Get familiarized with the new concepts of advanced techniques in
therapeutics a c
Session Description of Topic (Theory)
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I - Principles of Drug Delivery Systems 9
1. Modes of drug delivery 1 C 1 1
2. Absorption distribution metabolism excretion
characteristics of drugs 1 C 1 1
3. Kinetics of drug delivery 1 C,D 1 1
4. Controlled drug delivery - site specific drugs 1 C 1 1
5. Barriers for drug targeting - passive and active targeting 1 C 1,2 1
6. Strategies for site specific drug delivery 1 C 1,2 1
7. Time and rate controlled delivery of drugs 1 C 1,2 1
8. Antibody based drug delivery systems 1 C 1,2 1
9. Metabolism-based drug delivery systems 1 C 1,2 1
Unit II - Targetted Nanoparticles for Drug Delivery 9
10. Classification of targeted drug delivery systems 1 C 1,2 2
11. Nanoparticles surface modification – Bioconjugation 1 C 1,2 2
12. Nanoparticles surface modification– PEGylation 1 C 1,2 2
13. Antibodies - cell-specific targeting 1 C 1,2 2
14. Controlled drug release 1 C,D 1,2 2
15. Gold nanoparticles for drug delivery 1 C 1,2 2
16. Multi-functional gold nanoparticles for drug delivery 1 C 1,2 2
17. Virus based-nanoparticles for drug delivery system 1 C 1,2 2
18. Virus based-nanoparticles for targeted drug delivery system 1 C 1,2 2
Unit III - Polymeric Drug Carriers 8
19. Polymers - classification - polymer micelles as drug
carriers- polymers nanotubes 1 C 2 2,3
20. Magnetic nanoparticles as drug carriers 1 C 2,3 2,3
21. Dendrimers - synthesis – tecto-dendrimers 1 C 3 2,3
22. Nanoscale containers – nanoscafold systems; Gene
transfection 1 C 3 2,3
23. Carbon nanotubes in diagnosis and therapy 1 C 3 2,3
85 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
24. Liposomes for pharmaceutical and cosmetic applications-
lipid-DNA complexes 1 C 3 2,3
25. Liposomal peptide and protein drug delivery 1 C 3 2,3
26. Liposomal peptide and protein drug delivery - Liposomal
anticancer and antifungal agents 1 C 3 2,3
Unit IV - Nanoparticle Targeted Systems for Cancer
Treatment 8
27. Targeted delivery through enhanced permeability and
retention 1 C 3 3
28. Cancer markers - Folate receptors 1 C 3 3
29. Targeting through angiogenesis 1 C 3 3
30. Targeting to specific organs or tumor types - tumor-specific
targeting 1 C 3 3
31. Combination therapy and Neutron capture therapy 1 C 3 3
32. Targeting tumor vasculature for imaging 1 C 3 3
33. Delivery of specific anticancer agents: paclitaxel,
doxorubicin. 1 C,D 3 3
34. Delivery of specific anticancer agents: 5-Fluorouracil 1 C,D 3 3
Unit V - Smart Delivery Systems 8
35. Vascular zip codes and nanoparticle targeting 1 C,D 3 4
36. Theranostic metal nanoshells 1 C,D 3 4
37. Photothermally-modulated drug delivery using nanoshell 1 C,D 3 4
38. Hydrogel composites 1 C 3 4
39. Nanoporous microsystems for islet cell replacement 1 C 3 4
40. Molecularly-derived therapeutics - transdermal drug
delivery using low-frequency sonophoresis 1 C,D 3 4
41. Nanoporous implants for controlled drug delivery 1 C,D 3 4
42. Functionalized cyclodextrin nanoparticles, Responsive
release system 1 C 3 4
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. Text Books/Reference Books
1. Vladimir P Torchilin, “Nanoparticulates as drug carriers”, Imperial College Press, 2006
2. Deepak Thassu, Michel Deleers, Yashwant Vishnupa, “Nanoparticulate drug delivery systems”, CRC
Press, 2007
3. Irene Brigger, Catherine Dubernet, Patrick Couvreur “Nanoparticles in cancer therapy and diagnosis
Advanced Drug Delivery”, CRC Press, 2002
4. Tejal Desai, “BioMEMS and Biomedical Nanotechnology: Therapeuti micro/ nanotechnology”, Volume 3,
Springer, 2006
86 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT314E Nanomedicine L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanobiotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
This course offers a survey of timely concepts in the rapidly emerging field of nanomedicine. This course
will introduce basic principles underlying nanomedicine and review how nanomedicine is redefining
clinical research in areas such as diagnostic imaging agents and nanomaterial-based drug delivery.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to
1. Comprehend the principles behind nanomedicine a
2. Gain a broad understanding of concepts and applications of nanomedicine a c
3. Apply concepts of nanomedicine to a focused clinical area of their choice d
4. Acquire knowledge to apply these nanosystems for the diagnosis and therapy. a c
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Nanomaterials for Medical Application 9
1. Carbon nanotubes 1 C 1,4 1
2. Gold nanorods in sensing 1 C 1,4 1
3. Neural prosthetics 1 C 1,4 1
4. Isohelical DNA-binding oligomers 1 C 1,4 1
5. Nanospearing- multifunctional glyco-nanoparticles 1 C 1,4 1
6. Nanoconstructions based on spatially ordered nucleic acid
molecules 1 C 1,4 1
7. DNA self-assembling nanostructures induced by trivalent
ions 1 C 1,4 1
8. Assembling by polycations 1 C 1,4 1
9. Polymer-based capsules 1 C 1,4 1
Unit II : Regenerative Nanomedicine 9
10. Biocompatibility of traditional medical implants 1 C 2,3 2
11. Adhesive interactions with implant surfaces 1 C 2,3 2
12. Nanorobot immunoreactivity- nanopyrexia 1 C 2,3 2
13. Nanorobot, mutagenicity and carcinogenicity 1 C 2,3 2
14. Thermocompatibility, mechanocompatibility 1 C 2,3 2
15. Cell membrane disruption 1 C 2,3 2
16. Systemic nanoparticle distribution and phagocytosis 1 C 2,3 2
17. Nanomaterial volumetric intrusiveness- nanobiotechnology
in tissue engineering 1 C 2,3 2
18. Nanobiotechnology for organ replacement and assisted
function 1 C 2,3 2
Unit III: Nano-Biomolecules in Biomedical Imaging 8
19. Introduction to biomedical imaging 1 C 2,4 1,3
20. The emergence of nanoparticles as imaging platform in
biomedicine 1 C 2,4 1,3
21. Magnetic resonant imaging- principle and techniques 1 C 2,4 1,3
22. MRI- working methodology, Paramagnetic contrast agents 1 C 2,4 1,3
87 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
23. USPIOS, SPIOS, MPIOS for imaging 1 C 2,4 1,3
24. Magnetic nanosensors- radio labeled nanoparticles 1 C 2,4 1,3
25. Acoustically reflective nanoparticles: application in
ultrasound imaging 1 C 2,4 1,3
26. Iodinated liposomes- quantum dots in optical imaging 1 C 2,4 1,3
Unit IV: Nanotherapeutics 8
27. Drug delivery to CNS - drug delivery across blood brain
barrier (BBB) 1 C 2,4 1,4
28. Nanowires for monitoring brain activity 1 C 2,4 1,4
29. Neuroregeneration–nanoneurosurgery – nanolipoblockers -
antirestenosis drugs 1 C 2,4 1,4
30. Cell therapy for myocardial infarction - 1 C 2,4 1,4
31. Regeneration of the cardiovascular system 1 C 2,4 1,4
32. Nanobone implants and scaffolds; Nanocarriers for ocular
drug delivery 1 C 2,4 1,4
33. Nanoparticle drug formulations for spray inhalation - wound
healing 1 C 2,4 1,4
34. Nanogeriatrics – Orthodontal application 1 C 2,4 1,4
Unit V – 3D Bioprinting and Biosensing 8
35. 3D Bioprinting – introduction, principles 1 C 3,4 5
36. 3D Bioprinting technologies: ink jet based 1 C 3,4 5
37. Pressure assisted, Laser assisted, Solenoid valve based,
Acoustic jet based 1 C 3,4 5
38. Challenges and future development of 3D bio printing 1 C 3,4 5
39. Nanoparticles sensors 1 C 3,4 6
40. Calorimetric sensing – vapor phase sensing 1 C 3,4 6
41. Raman sensing at surfaces – electro analytical sensing 1 C 3,4 6
42. Plasma and optical sensing 1 C 3,4 6
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1. Michael Giersig, Gennady B. Khomutov,“Nanomaterials for Application in Medicine and Biology”,
Springer, 2008
2. Robert A. Freitas,“Nanomedicine, Volume IIA: Biocompatibility”, Landes Bioscience, 2011
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
3. Jeff W.M., Bulte and Michel M.J. Modo “Nanoparticles in Biomedical Imaging Emerging Technologies and
Applications”, Springer, 2010
4. Jain K. K., “Handbook of Nanomedicine”, Springer, 2012
5. Lijie Grace Zhang, John P Fisher, Kam Leong “3D Bioprinting and Nanotechnology in Tissue Engineering
and Regenerative medicine”, Elsevier, 2015
6. Stergios Logothetidis, “Nanomedicine and Nanobiotechnology”, Springer, 2012
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
88 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT315E Microelectronics and VLSI L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanoelectronics
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose The purpose of this course is to introduce the basics of the emerging field of microelectronics and
VLSI design
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Make the students familiar with the basics, applications and
implementations in microelectronic technology in integrated circuits a
2. Understand the basic concepts of VLSI circuit design a d
3. Understand the underlying physical processes governing the low-power
VLSI technology a e
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Fundamentals Of Electronic Devices 9
1. Semiconductor physics: basic concepts 1 C 1 1,4
2. Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, p-n junction under open-
circuit 1 C 1 1,4
3. Reverse bias and forward-bias conditions 1 C 1 1,4
4. The diode as a circuit element- Basic N-P-N Transistors Action 1 C 1 1,4
5. Ebers–Moll representation of bipolar transistors 1 C 1 1,4
6. Small Signal models of Bipolar Transistors 1 C 1 1,4
7. Small signal Model of JFET Amplifiers: classification 1 C 1 1,4
8. Representation of amplifier, CE,CB and operational amplifier 1 C 1 1,4
9. F/B concept &ideal F/B amplifiers 1 C 1 1,4
Unit II: Digital Electronics 9
10. Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal number systems and
conversions -Truth 1 C,D 1 3,4
11. Boolean algebra 1 C,D 1 3,4
12. Tables of logic gates (AND, OR, NOT), NAND, NOR
universal 1 C,D 1 3,4
13. Difference between combinational circuits and sequential
circuits 1 C 1 3,4
14. Introduction to flip-flops (S-R & J-K) 1 C,D 1 3,4
15. Asynchronous counters 1 C,D 1 3,4
16. Synchronous counters; Memory devices: general memory
operations 1 C 1 3,4
17. Read only memory (ROM) 1 C 1 3,4
18. Semiconductor random access memory (RAM) 1 C 1 3,4
Unit III: Introduction to IC Technologies and Basic VLSI
Design Styles 8
19. Fabrication process flow: basic steps 1 C 2 2,4,5
20. Layout rules- Basic VLSI design styles 1 C 2 2,4,5
21. NMOS, PMOS,CMOS, BiCMOS 1 C 2 2,4,5
22. Introduction to CMOS; Combinatorial CMOS Logic 1 C 2 2,4,5
23. MOS logic circuits with depletion nMOS loads-CMOS D- latch 1 C 2 2,4,5
89 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
24. Edge triggered Flip – Flop 1 C 2 2,4,5
25. Pass transistor circuits 1 C 2 2,4,5
26. Overview of power consumption 1 C 2 2,4,5
Unit IV: VLSI Design Techniques 8
27. Introduction, overview of VLSI design methodologies 1 C 2 2,4,5
28. VLSI design methodologies step by step procedure 1 C 2 2,4,5
29. VLSI design flow introduction to MOSFET- MOS models 1 C 2 2,4,5
30. DC MOSFET models 1 C 2 2,4,5
31. Small signal MOSFET models 1 C 2 2,4,5
32. High frequency MOSFET models 1 C 2 2,4,5
33. Testing : need for testing and testing principles 1 C 2 2,4,5
34. Design for testability 1 C 2 2,4,5
Unit V: Low-Power VLSI Design 8
35. Introduction- Need for low power VLSI chips 1 C 3 2,4,5
36. Charging and discharging of capacitance 1 C 3 2,4,5
37. Short circuit current in CMOS circuits 1 C 3 2,4,5
38. CMOS leakage current, Static current- Power analysis 1 C,D 3 2,4,5
39. Gate-level- architecture level 1 C 3 2,4,5
40. Data correlation analysis- random logic signals 1 C 3 2,4,5
41. Signal entropy – transistor and gate sizing 1 C,D 3 2,4,5
42. Switching activity reduction; Parallel architecture with voltage
reduction 1 C 3 2,4,5
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1. Millman and Grabel, “Microelectronics”, 2nd Ed. Tata McGraw-Hill, 1999
2. Weste N.H., “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design”, Pearson Education, India, 2002
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
3. Tocci R.J., and Widmer N.S., “Digital Systems – Principles and Applications”, 8th Ed., Pearson Education,
India, 2001
4. Boylestad and Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, 8th Ed, Pearson Education, India, 2002
5. Kang S.M. & Y. Leblibici, “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits-Analysis & Design”, TMH, 2003
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
90 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT316E Introduction To Scientific Research L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Research Methodology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
The aim is to make the undergraduates familiar with the research ethics and plagiarism. As they are
expected to undertake a research project for fulfillment of their degree, research methodology and
scientific writing is included.
INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the research ethics and plagiarism c f
2. Understand the importance of honesty and integrity in academic life f
3. Make the learner familiarize with scientific research methodology b f
4. Give a general introduction to scientific writing b
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C/D/I/O IOs Reference
Unit I: Research Ethics – I 9
1. Introduction – ethics and science 1 C 1 1-2
2. Code of ethics - engineering ethics 1 C 1,2 1-2
3. Standards of ethical conduct in science 1 C 1 1-2
4. Global research ethics 1 C 1 1-2
5. Intellectual property 1 C 1 1-2
6. Patent and copy rights authorship and credit 1 C 1 1-2
7. Conflict of interest, error and negligence 1 C 1,2 1-2
8. Case studies – cloning scandal, miracle drug thalidomide 1 C 1,3 1-2
9. Jan Hendrik Schön case and the Baltimore affair 1 C 1,2,3 1-2
Unit II: Research Ethics – II 9
10. Scientific misconduct 1 C 1,2 1-2
11. Forms of misconduct, cheating 1 C 1,2 1-2
12. Plagiarism – recognizing plagiarism 1 C 1,2 1-2
13. Self-plagiarism, ghostwriting, detection 1 C 1,2 1-2
14. Honor code system 1 C 1,2 1-2
15. Prejudice and intuition 1 C 1,2 1-2
16. Observation bias, self misunderstanding 1 C 1,2 1-2
17. Egoism, and some plagiarism cases in India 1 C 1,2 1-2
18. Plagiarism cases in abroad 1 C 1,2 1-2
Unit III: Research Methodology – I 8
19. Good science, bad science and pseudoscience 1 C 1,3 1-5
20. Ways of identification, Curiosity and research 1 C 1,3 1-5
21. Empiricism, rationalism, intuition 1 C 1,3 1-5
22. Authority, Literature review 1 C 1,3 1-5
23. Elementary scientific method - observations 1 C 1,3 1-5
24. Problem identification, basic assumptions 1 C 1,3 1-5
25. Formulation of an hypothesis 1 C 1,3 1-5
26. Hypothesis driven research design; Identification of
experimental techniques 1 C 1,3 1-5
91 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Unit IV: Research Methodology – II 8
27. Design of apparatus 1 C 3 1,2
28. Experimentation – sampling and measurements 1 C 3 1,2
29. Replication of the data, data analysis 1 C 3 1-2
30. Error of measurement 1 C 3 1-2
31. Classification of errors 1 C 3 1-2
32. Interpretation of the data to test the hypothesis 1 C 3 1-2
33. Mathematical modeling 1 C 3 1-2
34. Numerical computation; Result presentation 1 C 3 1-2
Unit V: Scientific Writing 8
35. Authenticity, accuracy and originality of the work 1 C 3,4 1-6
36. Title preparation; List of authors and addresses 1 C 3,4 1-6
37. Abstract and introduction writing 1 C 3,4 1-6
38. Description of methods 1 C 3,4 1-6
39. Measurements and analysis 1 C 3,4 1-6
40. Explanation of results, discussion and acknowledgement 1 C 3,4 1-6
41. References, paper/poster presentation 1 C 3,4 1-6
42. Electronic publication 1 C 3,4 1-6
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. Text Books
1. National academy of Science, National academy of Engineering, and Institute of Medicine, “On being a
scientist: A guide to responsible conduct in research”, Third edition, The National Academics Press, 2009
2. Adam Briggle and Carl Mitcham, “Ethics and science: An Introduction”, Cambridge University Press,
2012
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
3. David B. Resnik, “The ethics of science: An introduction”, Routledge Publication, 1998
4. Gary Comstock, “Research Ethics: A philosophical guide to the responsible conduct of Research”
Cambridge University Press, 2013
5. E. Bright Wilson, “An Introduction to Scientific Research”, Dover Publication, 1990
6. Robert A. Day, Barbara Gastel, “How to write and publish a scientific paper”, Cambridge University Press,
Seventh Edition, 2012
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
92 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT317E Nanocatalysts L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanomaterials
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
Catalysis uses in high impact areas such as improved chemical process efficiency, environmental
remediation and development of energy. So this course will provide fundamental understanding of
catalytic kinetics and study of various type nanocatalysts.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Explain reaction kinetics and adsorption and desorption processes a
2. Explain the different type of reaction mechanism a c
3. Describe the most important industrial catalytic processes and catalysts a
4. Describe catalytic processes at nano-levels a c e
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Introduction, Concept and Catalyst Characterization 9
1. Rate of reaction 1 C 1,2 1,2
2. Elementary step and rate determining step (RDS) 1 C 1,2 1,2
3. Reaction pathway 1 C 1 1,2
4. Reaction rate in reactors 1 C,D 1 1,2
5. BET theory, total surface area 1 C 1,2 1,2
6. Pore volume and pore size distribution 1 C 1,2 1,2
7. Hg porosimetry method 1 C 1,2 1,2
8. N2 desorption method 1 C 1,2 1,2
9. Overall pore size distribution 1 C 1,2 1,2
Unit II: Adsorption and Desorption Processes 9
10. Adsorption Rate 1 C 1,2 1,2
11. Desorption Rate 1 C 1,2 1,2
12. Adsorption equilibrium on uniform surfaces-Langmuir isotherms
single-site (non-dissociative) adsorption 1 C 1,2 1,2
13. Dual-site (dissociative) adsorption 1 C 1,2 1,2
14. Derivation of the Langmuir isotherm 1 C,D 1,2 1,2
15. Adsorption equilibrium on non-uniform surfaces-Langmuir
isotherms 1 C 1,2 1,2
16. The Freundlich isotherm 1 C 1,2 1,2
17. The Temkin Isotherm 1 C 1,2 1,2
18. Activated adsorption 1 C,D 1,2 1,2
Unit III: Kinetics and Mechanisms 8
19. Transition-state theory (TST), the steady-state approximation
(SSA) 1 C 3,4 1,2
20. Heats of adsorption - atomic 1 C 3,4 1,2
21. Heats of adsorption - molecular 1 C,D 4 1,2
22. Activation barriers - dissociation 1 C 4 1,2
23. Activation barriers - recombination 1 C,D 4 1,2
24. Reaction Model with a RDS - unimolecular and bimolecular 1 C 4 1,2
93 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
25. Langmuir-Hinshelwood mechanism 1 C 4 1,2
26. Eley-Rideal mechanism; Sabatier activity 1 C 4 1,2
Unit IV: Catalyst in Nanoscale 8
27. Noble metals nanocatalyst (Ru, Rh, Pd, Pt, etc) 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7
28. Polymer stabilized Rh and Ru nanoparticles 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7
29. Oxide supports for nano-catalysts; Carbon supports for nano-
catalysts 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7
30. Gold nanoparticle-based catalyst 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7
31. Gold vs. Palladium catalysts for the aerobic oxidation of alcohols 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7
32. Oxide based catalyst 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7
33. Metal free catalyst (CNT, Graphene, h-BN etc. based Catalyst) 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7
34. Transition metal dichalcogenides based catalyst 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7
Unit V: Application of Nano-Catalyst 8
35. Toxic Gases conversion using nanocatalyst: NOx 1 C,D 4,5 3,4
36. CO oxidation using nanocatalyst 1 C,D 4 5,6,7
37. Hydrogenation of compounds with C≡C bonds, hydrogenation of
aromatic compounds 1 C 4 5,6,7
38. Green house gases: CO2 conversion 1 C 4 5,6,7
39. Dissociative mechanism: oxygen reduction reaction using
nanocatalyst 1 C 4 5,6,7
40. Associative mechanism: oxygen reduction reaction using
nanocatalyst 1 C 4 5,6,7
41. Hydrogen Production using oxide and dichalcogenides based
catalyst 1 C,D 4 5,6,7
42. Photocatalytic reaction using nanocatalyst 1 C,D 4 5,6,7
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1. M. Albert Vannice, "Kinetics of Catalytic Reactions", Springer, 2008
2. Kurt W. Kolasinaski, "Surface Science: Foundations of Catalysis and Nanoscience Second Edition", 2nd
Edition, John Wiley & Sons, England, 2005
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
3. Edited by Ryan Richards, "Surface and Nanomolecular Catalysis", Taylor & Francis, FL 33487-2742, 2006
4. Edited by Didier Astruc "Nanoparticles and Catalysis", WILEY-VCH, Weinheim, 2008
5.
Antonino Salvatore Aricò, Peter Bruce, Bruno Scrosati, Jean-Marie Tarascon and Walter van Schalkwijk,
“Nanostructured materials for advanced energy conversion and storage devices”, Nature Materials, 4, 366-
377, 2005
6. Yan Jiao, Yao Zheng, Mietek Jaroniec and Shi Zhang Qiao, “Design of electrocatalysts for oxygen- and
hydrogen-involving energy conversion reactions”, Chem. Soc. Rev., 44, 2060-2086, 2015
7. Santosh Bahadur Singh, Praveen Kumar Tandon, “Catalysis: A Brief Review on Nano-Catalyst”, Journal of
Energy and Chemical Engineering, 2, 106-115, 2014
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
94 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT321E Nano and Micro Emulsions L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanoscience
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting --, 2016
Purpose
The course is self-contained and broadly covers fundamental concepts, chemistry and mechanics of
emulsion of micro and nanosize which are used in industry as components in a huge range of formulated
products.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
5. Promote understanding of basic principles in chemistry of microemulsion a
6. Develop an interest among students to study about mechanism of emulsions c
7. Provide basic knowledge on formulation and characterization of
microemulsions c
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Introduction to Micro and Nano Emulsion 9
1. Introduction to emulsion 1 C 1 1,3
2. Definition of micro and nano emulsion 1 C 1 1,3
3. Theory of emulsion, Micro emulsions 1 C 1 1,3
4. Preparation of microemulsion 1 C 1 1,3
5. Winsor’s classification of microemulsions 1 C 1 1,3
6. Stability of micro emulsions 1 C 1 1,3
7. Rheology of microemulsion drops -Applications of
emulsions 1 C 1 1,3
8. Ostwald ripening, Flocculation and coalescence of drops 1 C 1 1,3
9. Applications of emulsions 1 C 1 1,3
Unit II: Properties of Emulsion 9
10. A phase diagram approach to microemulsion 1 C 1 1,2,3
11. Microemulsion formation 1 C 1 1,2,3
12. Physicochemistry of W/O microemulsion formation 1 C 1 1,2,3
13. Stability and droplet clustering 1 C 1 1,2,3
14. Phenomenon in microemulsion 1 C 1 1,2,3
15. Percolating phenomenon in microemulsion 1 C 1 1,2,3
16. Effect of external entity - microemulsions with mixed
nonionic surfactants 1 C 1 1,2,3
17. Microemulsions with mixed nonionic surfactants 1 C 1 1,2,3
18. Properties of microemulsions with mixed nonionic
surfactants 1 C 1 1,2,3
Unit III: Mechanism of Emulsification 8
19. Phase inversion phenomenon 1 C 2 2,4,5
20. Dynamic behavior of emulsion 1 C 2 2,4,5
21. Spontaneous emulsification 1 C 2 2,4,5
22. Recent development with emphasis on self emulsification, 1 C 2 2,4,5
23. Self-emulsification process 1 C 2 2,4,5
24. Symmetric thin liquid film with Fluid interfaces 1 C 2 2,4,5
95 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
25. Formation emulsified microemulsion and microemulsion
properties 1 C 2 2,4,5
26. Characterization of emulsified microemulsion 1 C 2 2,4,5
Unit IV: Formulation of Nanoemulsion 8
27. Nanoparticle formation in microemulsion 1 C 3 2,3,4,5
28. Concept of formation in microemulsion 1 C 3 2,3,4,5
29. Mechanism of microemulsion 1 C 3 2,3,4,5
30. Nanoparticles uptake from W/O emulsion 1 C 3 2,3,4,5
31. W/O emulsion process 1 C 3 2,3,4,5
32. TiO2 nanoparticle in mircroemulsion and photophysical
properties 1 C 3 2,3,4,5
33. Properties of interfacial electron transfer dynamics 1 C 3 2,3,4,5
34. Interfacial electron transfer dynamics 1 C 3 2,3,4,5
Unit V: Characterization and Application of
Microemulsion 8
35. NMR technique for measurement emulsion 1 C 3 3,4,5
36. Ultrasound characterization for emulsion 1 C 3 3,4,5
37. Ultrasound characterization for microemulsion 1 C 3 3,4,5
38. Physicochemical characterization and characterization
techniques types 1 C 3 3,4,5
39. Pharmaceutically applicable microemulsions 1 C 3 3,4,5
40. Places of microemulsion and emulsion in cancer therapy 1 C 3 3,4,5
41. In vitro and in vivo evaluation 1 C 3 3,4,5
42. Biocatalysis in microemulsion 1 C 3 3,4,5
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1 Berg J. C., “An Introduction to Interfaces and Colloids: The Bridge to Nanoscience”, World Scientific, 2010
2 Edited by Sjöblom J., “Emulsions and Emulsion Stability: Surfactant Science Series”, Volume 132, Marcel
Dekker, 2006
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
3 Monzerfanun, “Microemulsion properties and application”, Taylor and Francis group, 2009
4 Ghosh P., “Coalescence of drops in liquid, in Advances in Multiphase Flow and Heat Transfer”, Bentham
Science Publishers Ltd., 2012
5 Edited by Sjöblom J., “Encyclopedic Handbook of Emulsion Technology”, Marcel Dekker, 2001
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
96 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT401E Nanorobotics L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15MH311
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting --, 2016
Purpose
The goal of this course is to provide an insight into the fundamentals of nanorobotics manipulation &
assembly. It will also guide the students to gain scientific understanding regarding the role of
nanorobotics in the modern engineering applications.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand scientific concepts underlying engineering and
technological applications in nanorobotics a d
2. Acquire the knowledge of nanorobotics manipulation & fast imaging
system for advance Nanotechnology applications d
3. Get familiarize with the new concepts of real-time nanomanipulation &
assembly using CAD e
Session
Description of Topic Contact
hours C/D/I/O IOs Reference
Unit I: Actuation Methods for Nanorobotic
Manipulation & Assembly 9
1. Interaction forces in nanomanipulation 1 C 1,2 1-3
2. Electro kinetic based actuation 1 C 1,2 1-3
3. Electro kinetic manipulation of carbon nanotubes 1 C 1,2 1-3
4. Graphene, nanoparticles 1 C 1,2 1-3
5. Biological entities 1 C 1,2 1-3
6. Laser based actuation 1 C 1,2 1-3
7. Optical tweezers 1 C 1,2 1-3
8. Manipulation of biological entities & chemical entities 1 C 1,2 1-3
9. Piezoelectric enabled actuators 1 C 1,2 1-3
Unit II: Nanomanipulation 9
10. Dielectrophoretic based nanomanipulation 1 C 1,2 1-3
11. Theory- modelling of electro rotation 1 C 1,2 1-3
12. Dynamic effects of fluid medium 1 C 1,2 1-3
13. Nanoparticles by dielectrophoretic 1 C 1,2 1-3
14. Manipulation of CNT 1 C 1,2 1-3
15. Nanomanipulation by scanning probe 1 C 1,2 1-3
16. Reducing atomic scale stick 1 C 1,2 1-3
17. Slip motion ( nanomanipulation) 1 C 1,2 1-3
18. Slip motion by feedback control nanomanipulation 1 C 1,2 1-3
Unit III: Sensing & Fast Imaging System 8
19. Art of compressive sensing 1 C 2,3 1-3
20. Compressive sensing based fast imaging system 1 C 2,3 1-3
21. AFM based imaging 1 C 2,3 1-3
22. AFM based nanorobotic system 1 C 2,3 1-3
23. AFM based nanorobotic system enhanced by augmented
reality 1 C 2,3 1-3
24. Hardware & software setup 1 C 2,3 1-3
25. Experiments on nanomanipulation of nanoparticles-I 1 C 2,3 1-3
26. Experiments on nanomanipulation of nanoparticles-II 1 C 2,3 1-3
Unit IV: CAD & Real- Time Nanorobotic
Manipulation 8
27. CAD models and CAD models of nanostructures 1 C 3 1-3
97 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
28. Automated manipulation of nanoparticles 1 C 3 1-3
29. Nanorods and nanowires 1 C 3 1-3
30. Limitation of augmented reality system 1 C 3 1-3
31. Real time fault detection & correction 1 C 3 1-3
32. Time random drift compensation with local scan 1 C 3 1-3
33. Interpret on-line fault detection & correction 1 C 3 1-3
34. Implementation & experimental results ion of the data to
test the hypothesis 1 C 3 1-3
Unit V: Nanorobotic Applications 8
35. Wireless capsules endoscopy images and video 1 C 1 1-3
36. Energy harvesting nanorobotic 1 C 1 1-3
37. Capsules robot in gastro-intestinal tract 1 C 1 1-3
38. Nanorobots 1 C 1 1-3
39. Cooperative control design for nanorobots 1 C 1 1-3
40. Cooperative control design for nanorobots in drug delivery 1 C 1 1-3
41. Medical applications of nanorobots 1 C 1 1-3
42. Cancer targeted therapy using nanorobots 1 C 1 1-3
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. Text Books
1. Ning Xi, Guangyoung Li, “Introduction to Nanorobotic Manipulation & Assembly” Artech House Press,
2012
2. Yi Guo,”Selected Topics in Micro/Nano-robotic for Biomedical Applications”, Springer, 2013
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
3. Klaus D. Sattler, “Hand Book of Nanophysics: Nano medicine & Nanorobotics”, CRC Press, 2010
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
98 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT402E Micro and Nanofluidics L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanoscience
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
The goal of this course is to introduce students to the physical principles to analyze fluid flow in micro and
nano-size devices. It unifies the thermal sciences with electrostatics, electrokinetics, colloid science;
electrochemistry; and molecularbiology.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Apply advanced matrix knowledge to Engineering problems a
2. Introduce to the students, the various opportunities in the emerging field
ofmicro and nano fluids a c
3. Make students familiar with the important concepts applicable to micro and
nanofluidic devices, their fabrication, characterization and application a
4. Get familiarized with the new concepts of real-time nanomanipulation &
Assembly a
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Microfluidics Microscale Gas Flow 9
1. Introduction: Fundamentals of kinetic theory-molecular
models 1 C 1 1
2. Kinetic theory-molecular models of micro and macroscopic
properties 1 C 1 1
3. Binary collisions, distribution functions 1 C 1 1
4. Boltzmann equation and Maxwellian distribution functions 1 C 1 1
5. Wall slip effects and accommodation coefficients 1 C 1 1
6. Flow and heat transfer analysis of microscale, Couette flows 1 C 1 1
7. Pressure driven gas micro- flows with wall slip effects 1 C 1 1
8. Heat transfer in micro- Poiseuille flows 1 C 1 1
9. Effects of compressibility of micro flows 1 C 1 1
Unit II: Microscale Liquid Flow 9
10. Micro and nanofluids-Fluid-Nanoscale 1 C 1,2 1,2
11. Applications- Preparatory concepts 1 C 1,2 1,2
12. Laws, classification of fluid flows determination of transport
properties 1 C 1,2 1,2
13. Continuum approximation and its limitations 1 C 1,2 1,2
14. Kinematics 1 C 1,2 1,2
15. Surface and body forces 1 C 1,2 1,2
16. Navier- Stokes equation properties 1 C 1,2 1,2
17. Two-dimensional Navier- Stokes equation 1 C 1,2 1,2
18. Steady and incompressible Navier- Stokes equation 1 C 1,2 1,2
Unit III: Microscale Viscous Flow 8
19. Introduction: structure of flow in a pipe or channel 1 C 3 2,5,1
20. Posiseuille flow in a pipe 1 C 3 2,5,1
21. Velocity in slip flow (gases, liquids) 1 C 3 2,5,1
22. Flow in a thin film under gravity 1 C 3 2,5,1
23. Derive the thin film under gravity 1 C 3 2,5,1
24. Developing suction flows 1 C 3 2,5,1
25. Surface tension driven flow 1 C 3 2,5,1
26. Sedimentation of a solid particle, Simple model for blood
flow 1 C 3 2,5,1
99 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Unit IV: Microfluidics and Lab-On-a-Chip 8
27. Introduction - concepts microfluidic devices 1 C 4 4,5
28. Advantages of microfluidic devices 1 C 4 4,5
29. Fluidic transport 1 C 4 4,5
30. Scaling - materials for the manufacture 1 C 4 4,5
31. (Silicon, glass, polymers) materials for the manufacture 1 C 4 4,5
32. Fluidic structures 1 C 4 4,5
33. Stacking - fabrication methods 1 C 4 4,5
34. Surface modifications – spotting; Detection mechanisms 1 C 4 4,5
Unit V: Elements of Electrochemistry, Electrical Double
Layer and Applications 8
35. Electro chemistry, electrical double layer 1 C 4 3,4
36. Electro-chemical potential, chemical potential-acid and base 1 C 4 3,4
37. Electrolyte, electrical conductivity, semi-permeable
membrane 1 C 4 3,4
38. Micro and nano fluidics devices application 1 C 4 4
39. Fabrication and design of microfluid device 1 C 4 4
40. DNA transport-development of artificial kidney 1 C 4 4
41. Electrochemical sensing 1 C 4 2,3
42. Receptor and Transducer based classification of biosensors,
Nanopores and nanopore membrane for biochemical sensing 1 C 4 2,3
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test I 1
44. Cycle test II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1. Terrence Conlisk, “Essential of Micro and nanofluidics: with applications to biological and chemical
sciences”, Cambridge University Press, 2012
2. Joshua Edel, “Nanofluidics”, RCS publishing, 2009
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
3. HenrikBruus, “Theoretical Microfluidics”, Oxford Master Series in Physics,2007
4. PatricTabeling, “Introduction to Microfluids”, Oxford U. Press, 2005
5. Christof M. Niemeyer & Chad A. Mirkin, “Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Application and Perspectives”,
Wiley VCH, 2004
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
100 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT403E Nanotechnology for Energy Systems L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / -
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanomaterials
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
The course aims to educate students on the basic and creative concepts of energy technologies in
the aspect of Nanotechnology and equip students in managing these technologies in their future
professions
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the basic concepts involved in energy systems and to
explore applications of nanotechnology. a
2. Enable students to acquire the knowledge of various nanomaterials
researched and implemented to develop energy systems a e
3. Identify the urgency of energy solutions a
Session
Description of Topic Contact
hours C/D/I/O IOs Reference
Unit I: Renewable and Nonrenewable Energy
Technology 9
1. Energy Challenge in the 21st Century 1 C 1-3 1-3
2. Nanotechnology in energy research 1 C 1-3 1-3
3. Conventional fossil fuels 1 C 2 1,2
4. Unconventional fossil fuels 1 C 2 1-3
5. Nanotechnology in fuel production 1 C 2 1-3
6. Renewable energy sources-photovoltaics 1 C 2 1-3
7. Hydrogen production - fuel cells- thermoelectricity 1 C 2 1-3
8. Advantages of renewable energy technologies 1 C 2,3 1-3
9. Implementation of renewable energy technologies 1 C 2,3 1-3
Unit II: Photovoltaics 9
10. Terrawatt challenges in photovoltaics 1 C 2 1,2
11. Limits in conversion efficiency 1 C 2 1,2
12. Hybrid concepts 1 C 2 1,2
13. Semiconductors optical properties 1 C 2 1,2
14. Optical absorption 1 C 2 1,2
15. Dye molecular engineering 1 C 2 1,2
16. Stable self-assembling dye 1 C 2 1,2
17. Monomolecular layer 1 C 2 1-2
18. The nanostructured semiconductors 1 C 2 1-2
Unit III: Thermoelectricity 8
19. Bulk thermoelectric materials 1 C 1-3 1-2
20. Bulk thermoelectric materials- size effects 1 C 1-3 1-2
21. Thermoelectric properties on nanoscale: modeling 1 C 1,2 1-2
22. Thermoelectric properties on nanoscale: metrology 1 C 1,2 1-2
23. Bi nanostructures, Silicon nanowire 1 C 1,2 1-2
24. Thermionics nanocomposites 1 C 1,2 1-2
25. Thermoelectric nanocomposites 1 C 1,2 1-2
26. Application of thermionic and thermoelectric
nanocomposites 1 C 1,2 1-2
Unit IV: Fuel Cells 8
27. Low temperature fuel cells 1 C 1-3 1-3
28. Cathode and anode reaction 1 C 1-3 1-3
29. Practical fuel cell catalysts and Electrolytes 1 C 2 1-3
101 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
30. High temperature fuel cells 1 C 1,2 1-3
31. High temperature ceramic electro catalysts 1 C 1,2 1-3
32. Application of high temperature ceramic electro catalysts 1 C 1,2 1-3
33. Solid oxide fuel cells (SOFCs) 1 C 1,2 1-3
34. Dry hydrocarbons in SOFC 1 C 1,2 1-3
Unit V: Hydrogen Production and Storage 8
35. Hydrogen energy transition 1 C 1-3 3
36. Semiconductor based hydrogen production 1 C 1-3 3
37. Nanomaterial based photoelectron chemical cell;
Sensitization 1 C 1,2 1,3
38. Hydrogen storage: technological barriers 1 C 2 2,3
39. Hydrogen storage technology –potential storage materials-
hydrogen sorption 1 C 2 2,3
40. Properties of materials: physical storage, thermodynamic
and kinetics 1 C 2 2,3
41. Nanostructured carbon, zeolites- clathrates- polymers 1 C 2,3 1-3
42. Metals and complex hydrides- chemical hydrides-
nanocomposites 1 C 2,3 1-3
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test I 1
44. Cycle test II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. Text Books /Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1. Javier Garcia-Martinez, “Nanotechnology for the Energy Challenge”, WILEY-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co.,
2010
2. Anatoli Korkin, David J, “Nanoscale Applications for Information and Energy Systems”, Springer, 2013
3. Darren P. Broom, “Hydrogen Storage materials: The characterization of their properties”, Springer, 2011
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
102 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT404E Photovoltaic Technology L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanomaterials
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose The course aims to educate students on the basic principles and design of photovoltaic cell technology
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Acquire adequate knowledge on photovoltaic devices a c
2. Develop an understanding of the primary photovoltaic device technologies and their design a c e
3. Gain exposure to the various applications of photovoltaics a
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours
C-D-I-
O IOs Reference
Unit I: Introduction 9
1. Historical development; present and future global issues 1 C 1-3 1-4
2. Historical development; drivers- commercialization/economic factors 1 C 1-3 1-4
3. Basic components of PV systems 1 C 1-3 1-4
4. Types of PV systems 1 C 1-3 1-4
5. The solar spectrum 1 C 1-3 1-4
6. Terrestrial and space spectra; air mass (AM0, AM1.5) 1 C 1-3 1-4
7. 1st, generation photovoltaics 1 C 1-3 1-4
8. 2nd generation photovoltaics 1 C 1-3 1-4
9. 3rd generation photovoltaics 1 C 1-3 1-4
Unit II: Semiconductor Properties For PV 9
10. Optical absorption and carrier photogeneration 1 C 1-3 1-4
11. Direct vs. indirect bandgaps 1 C 1-3 1-4
12. Minority carrier transport properties- Carrier recombination-lifetime and defects 1 C 1-3 1-4
13. Band to band and Shockley-Read-hall - High injection effects 1 C 1-3 1-5
14. Surface and interface recombination 1 C 1-3 1-4
15. PN homojunctions and carrier transport under broad spectrum illumination 1 C 1-3 1-4
16. Photocurrent and spectral response 1 C 1-3 1-4
17. Current transport models 1 C 1-3 1-4
18. Non-idealities and real PN diodes under illumination 1 C 1-3 1-4
Unit III: Solar Cell Design 8
19. Solar Cell parameters 1 C 1-3 1-5
20. Efficiency calculations (EFF, VOC, JSC) for ideal cells 1 C,D 1-3 1-4
21. Non-idealities: series resistance, shunt resistance 1 C 1-3 1-4
22. Optical loss mechanisms 1 C 1-3 1-4
23. Electrical loss mechanisms 1 C 1-3 1-4
24. Basics of solar cell device design 1 C 1-3 1-4
25. Lateral design and Vertical design 1 C 1-3 1-4
26. Optical versus electrical tradeoffs and optimization 1 C 1-3 1-4
Unit IV: Silicon and Thin Film Photovoltaic Cells 8
27. Si photovoltaics 1 C 1-3 1
28. High efficiency single crystal Si PV designs 1 C,D 1-3 1
29. Polycrystalline/microcrystalline Si solar cells and Amorphous Si 1 C 1-3 1
30. Heterojunctions – review 1 C 1-3 1
31. Thin film II-VI and chalcopyrite photovoltaics 1 C 1-3 1
32. CdTe/CdS thin film cell technologies 1 C,D 1-3 1-4
33. CuInGaSe2/CdS thin film cell technologies 1 C,D 1-3 1-4
34. Dye-Sensitized solar cells 1 C 1-3 1-4
103 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Unit V: High Efficiency Photovoltaics 8
35. III-V multi-junction solar cells 1 C 1-3 1-4
36. Spectral splitting and the GaInP/GaAs/Ge triple junction solar cell 1 C 1-3 1-4
37. Bandgap profile optimization and solar spectrum matching 1 C,D 1-3 1-4
38. Tunnel junctions and current matching limitations 1 C,D 1-3 1-4
39. Concentrator photovoltaics (CPV)- Concentrator optics, cells and terrestrial
CPV systems 1 C 1-3 1-4
40. Concentrator photovoltaics (CPV)- cells and terrestrial CPV systems 1 C 1-3 1-4
41. Space photovoltaics- radiation effects in semiconductors and solar cells 1 C,D 1-3 1-4
42. New concepts – quantum dots, wires, intermediate band, multiple exciton 1 C 1-3 1-4
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test I 1
44. Cycle test II 2
Total contact hours 45
learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books/Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1 Solanki C.S., “Solar photovoltaics - fundamentals, technologies and applications”, 3rd edition, PHI LearningPvt Ltd,
New Delhi, India
2 Fonash S.J., “Solar Cell Device Physics”, Academic, 2010
3 Moller H.J., “Semiconductors for Solar Cells”,Artech House, 1993
4 Green M.A., “Third Generation Photovoltaics: Advanced Solar Energy Conversion”, Springer, 2006
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
104 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT405E Nanotechnology in Cosmetics L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards
Course Category P Department Elective Nanobiotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To provide knowledge about new trends in cosmetics, the types ofnanomaterials used in cosmetics and their
properties as cosmetic agents
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Gain the knowledge in basics of nanotechnology in cosmetics a
2. Understand about the effects of using nanoparticles over conventional methods d
3. Acquire knowledge about current trends and future aspects in the field of cosmetics a
4. Pursue course and let work in a multi-disciplinary team environment c
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Introduction to Cosmetics Technology 9
1. Introduction to cosmetics 1 C 1 1
2. Purposes and meaning of cosmetics 1 C 1 1
3. Cosmeceuticals 1 C 1 1
4. Classification of cosmetics 1 C 1 1
5. Quality characteristics 1 C 1 1
6. Quality assurance 1 C 1 1
7. Development process of cosmetics 1 C 1 1
8. Scientific background technology 1 C 1 1
9. Future trends 1 C 1 1
Unit II: Excipients & its Applications in Cosmetics 9
10. Oily materials: introduction, oils and fats, wax 1 C 1 1
11. Hydrocarbons, higher fatty acids 1 C 1 1
12. Higher alcohols, esters, silicones 1 C 1 1
13. Surface active agents : introduction anionic surfactant, cationic, surfactants 1 C 1 1
14. Amphoteric surfactant, non-ionic surfactant, other surfactants 1 C 1 1
15. Humectants : introduction, choice of humectants 1 C 1 1
16. Unusual humectants, special uses of humectants 1 C 1 1
17. Antioxidants : introduction, general oxidative theory, measurement of
oxidation 1 C 1 1
18. Assessment of oxidant efficiency, choice of antioxidant 1 C 1 1
Unit III: Role of Polymers in Cosmetics 8
19. Film formers 1 C 2,4 2
20. Thickeners 1 C 2,4 2
21. Polymers in hair colouring 1 C 2,4 2
22. Conditioning polymers 1 C 2,4 2
23. Conditioning, cleansing 1 C 2,4 2
24. Silicones and emulsions 1 C 2,4 2
25. Types of polymeric systems 1 C 2,4 2
26. Stimuli responsive polymeric systems 1 C 2,4 2
Unit IV: Silicones 8
27. Multiple emulsions as novel delivery systems 1 C,D 2 3
28. Silicones and beyond 1 C 2 3
29. Organomodified silicones 1 C 2 3
30. New esters mimicking property for organomodified silicones 1 C 2 3
31. Silicones in shampoo 1 C 2 3
32. Minimalizing undesirable side effects 1 C 2 3
33. Substantive silicones and non-irritating silicones 1 C 2 3
105 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
34. Organomodified delivery systems - silicones personal care delivery system 1 C,D 2 3
Unit V: Case Studies 8
35. Dual nanodelivery systems- introduction 1 C 3 4
36. Synthesis of dual nanodelivery systems containing vitamin e for cosmetics
and pharmaceuticals 1 C 3 4
37. Characterization of dual nanodelivery systems containing vitamin e for
cosmetics and pharmaceuticals 1 C 3 4
38. Orthopedic implant titanium rods and Preparation of keratin coatings for
orthopedic implant titanium rods 1 C 3 4
39. Characterization of keratin coatings for orthopedic implant titanium rods 1 C 3 4
40. Nanotherapeutics as a treatment for inflammation 1 C 3 5
41. Moisturization and fortification of the skin barrier 1 C 3 5
42. Beauty from contact lenses beyond vision correction 1 C 3 4
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test I 1
44. Cycle test II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1. Mitsui T., “ New Cosmetic Science”, Elsevier, 1998
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
2. Sarah E.M., Kathleen O.H., Robert Y.L., “Cosmetic Nanotechnology: Polymers and Colloids in Cosmetics”, American
Chemical Society, 2006
3. Meyer R.R., “Delivery System Handbook for Personal Care and Cosmetic Products”, William Andrew ASP, 2005
4. Sarah E.M., Kathleen O.H., Robert Y.L., “Cosmetic Nanotechnology: Polymers and Colloids in Cosmetics”, American
Chemical Society, 2006
5. Angelo L., Jamie R., and Adam J.F., “Nanotechnology, Inflammation and the Skin Barrier: Innovative Approaches for
Skin Health and Cosmetics”, Cosmetics, 2015
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
106 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT406E Green Nanotechnology L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanobiotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics & Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose The purpose of this course is to introduce the novel concept of green manufacturing process and to enable students
to tackle environmental problems in their chosen area of application.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be
1. Familiar with the field of traditional manufacturing to green manufacturing h
2. Familiar with various processing of sustainable green manufacturing techniques a
3. Understanding the different types of waste management a
4. Able to improve the knowledge about Industrial ecology c
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours
C-D-I-
O IOs Reference
Unit I: Green Manufacturing Trends 9
1. Green Manufacturing - Fundamentals and Applications 1 C 1 1
2. Basic definitions 1 C 1 1
3. Issues surrounding green manufacturing at the process, machine and
system 1 C 1 1
4. Government motivations for green manufacturing 1 C 1 1
5. Traditional manufacturing to green manufacturing 1 C 1 1
6. Economic issues surrounding green manufacturing-External 1 C 1 1
7. Economic issues surrounding green manufacturing-Internal 1 C 1 1
8. Semiconductor and medical areas 1 C 1 2
9. Supply chain and packaging areas 1 C 1 2
Unit II: Sustainable Green Manufacturing 9
10. Green manufacturing sustainability - processes - requirements, and risk. 1 C 2 2
11. The sustainable lean and green audit process 1 C 2 2
12. International green manufacturing standards and compliance 1 C 2 2
13. International green manufacturing standards and compliance 1 C 2 2
14. Green rapid prototyping and rapid manufacturing 1 C,D 2 2
15. Green flexible automation 1 C 2 2
16. Green collaboration processes 1 C 2 2
17. Alternative energy resources 1 C 2 2
18. Sustainable green manufacturing system design 1 C,D 1,2 2
Unit III: Waste Management 8
19. Sustainability and global conditions 1 C 3 3
20. Material and solid waste management 1 C 3 3
21. Energy management 1 C 3 3
22. Chemical waste management and green chemistry 1 C 3,4 3
23. Climate change, air emissions management 1 C 3,4 3
24. Supply water and waste water management 1 C 3,4 3
25. Environmental business management 1 C 4 3
26. Present atmosphere and challenges 1 C 4 3
Unit IV: Industrial Ecology 8
27. Introduction - Material flows in chemical manufacturing - Industrial parks 1 C 4 5-9
28. Material flows in chemical manufacturing - Industrial parks 1 C 4 5-9
29. Assessing opportunities for waste exchanges 1 C 4 5-9
30. Assessing opportunities for by product synergies, Life cycle concepts 1 C 4 5-9
31. Product stewardship and green engineering 1 C 4 5-9
32. Regulatory, social and business environment for green manufacturing 1 C 4 5-9
107 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
33. Metrics and analytical tools - Green supply chains 1 C 4 5-9
34. Present state of green manufacturing 1 C 4 5-9
Unit V: Nanomaterials for "Green" Systems 8
35. Green materials, including biomaterials, biopolymers 1 C 2,4 4,6-9
36. Green materials, including bioplastics, and composites 1 C 2,4 4,6-9
37. Nanotech Materials for truly Sustainable Construction: Windows,
Skylights, and Lighting 1 C 2,4 6-9
38. Nanotech Materials for truly Sustainable Construction: Paints, Roofs,
Walls, and Cooling 1 C 2,4 6-9
39. Multifunctional Gas Sensors and biomimetic Sensor 1 C 2,4 6
40. Multifunctional Optical Interference Sensors 1 C 2,4 6
41. Thermo-light responsive smart materials Nanomaterials 1 C 2,4 6
42. Stimulus-responsive smart materials Nanomaterials 1 C 2,4 6
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test I 1
44. Cycle test II 2
Total contact hours 45
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books/ Reference Books/ Other Reading Material
1. David Dornfeld, “Green manufacturing fundamental and applications”, Prentice hall, 2002
2. Sammy Shinga G., “Green electronics design and manufacturing”, Prince Publications, 2008
3. Frank Kreith, George Tchobanoglous, “Solid waste management”, McGraw Hill, 2002
4. Stevens E.S., “Green plastics”, Princeton University press, 2002
5. Robert Ayres U., “A Handbook of Industrial Ecology”, Edward Elgar publishing, 2002
6. Ashby M.F., Daniel L. Schodek, “Nanomaterials, nanotechnologies and design: an introduction for engineers”, CRC
Press , 2010
7. David Allen T., David R.S., “Green engineering”, Prentice Hall NJ, 2002
8. James Clark, “Green chemistry”, Blackwell publishing, 2008
9. Paulo Davim,” Sustainable manufacturing”, Wiley publications, 2010
108 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT407E Nanocomputing L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose Nanocomputing is a new and promising technology with the potential of exponentially powerful computation.
Understanding basic concepts of nanocomputing and current state of research in this area is very essential.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the basic concept and its impacts on nanocomputing a
2. Understand the major advance in molecular, optical, biochemical computing a
3. Gain adequate knowledge in quantum computing e
4. Get familiarized with designing of parallel information processing machines e
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours
C-D-I-
O IOs Reference
Unit I: Nanocomputing Prospects and Challenges 9
1. History of computing, nanocomputing, quantum computers 1 C 1-4 1
2. Nanocomputing technologies 1 C 1 1
3. Alternative to transistor technology, quantum computing 1 C 1 1
4. Nano information processing 1 C 1 1
5. Prospects and challenges 1 C 1 1
6. Digital signals and gates 1 C 1 1
7. Silicon nanoelectronics 1 C 1 1
8. Carbon nanotube electronics 1 C 1 1
9. Carbon nanotube field effect transistors, nanocomputing 1 C 1 1
Unit II: Molecular and Optical Computing 9
10. Molecular computing 1 C 2 1
11. Origin of molecular computing 1 C 2 1
12. Molecular computing architecture 1 C 2 1
13. Challenges of molecular computing 1 C 2 1
14. Optical computing 1 C 2 1
15. Current use of optics for computing 1 C 2 1
16. Optical computing paradigms 1 C 2 1
17. Role of non-linear materials in nanocomputing 1 C 2 1
18. Photonic switches 1 C 2 1
Unit III: Biochemical Computing 8
19. Biological networks and neurons 1 C 2 2
20. Function of neuron cell on silicon 1 C 2 2
21. Modeling of neuron cells by VLSI circuits 1 C 2 2
22. Neural networks and distributed data processing 1 C 2 2
23. DNA computer 1 C 2 2
24. Information processing with chemical reactions 1 C 2 2
25. Nanomachines 1 C 3 2
26. Parallel Processing 1 C 3 2
Unit 4: Quantum Computing 8
27. Bit and Qubit 1 C 3 2
28. Superposition and entanglement 1 C 3 2
29. Quantum parallelisms, classical gates-reversible operations 1 C 3,4 2
30. Sqrt(NOT) operation-quantum algorithm 1 C 3 1
31. Challenges to large Quantum Computers 1 C 3 1
32. Fabrication, testing architectural challenges 1 C 3,4 1
33. Quantum dot cellular automata – computing with QCA 1 C 3,4 1
34. QCA clocking – QCA design rules 1 C,D 3 1
109 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Unit V: Parallel Architectures for Nanosystems 8
35. Mono and multiprocessor systems 1 C 4 2
36. Some considerations to parallel processing 1 C 4 2
37. Influence of delay time 1 C 4 2
38. Power dissipation 1 C 4 2
39. Architecture for processing in nanosystems: classic systolic arrays 1 C 4 2
40. Processor with large memory 1 C 4 2
41. Processor array with SIMD and PIP architectures 1 C 4 2
42. Reconfigurable computers, Teramac as a prototype 1 C 4 2
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test I 1
44. Cycle test II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Text Books/Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1 Vishal Sahni and Debabrata Goswami, “Nanocomputing: The Future of Computing”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2008
2 Karl Goser, Peter Glösekötter and Jan Dienstuhl, “Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From Transistors to Molecular
and Quantum devices”, Springer, 2005
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
110 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT408E Nanotechnology in Textiles L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanobiotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
The goal of this course is to provide an insight into the fundamentals of Nanomaterials based fabrics and their role
in modern trends in nanotechnology. It will also guide the students to gain scientific understanding regarding the
role of nanotechnology in the modern trend & textile Engineering
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand scientific concepts underlying engineering and technological applications in
Nano-textiles. a
2. Understand the nanoparticles & nanofiber in design methodology in textiles a c h
3. Study the characteristics and classification of the nano fabrics based material and their
role in modern trends in textile engineering. a c
4. Get familiarized with the new concepts of Nanotechnology based product in Textiles a c
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours
C-D-I-
O IOs Reference
Unit I: Nano Fibre Properties & Protection 9
1. Mechanical properties wet ability properties 1 C 1 1
2. Water absorption & storage properties 1 C 1 1
3. Appearance, air permeability 1 C 1 1
4. Electrical properties antistatic coating 1 C 1 1
5. Magnetic properties super 1 C 1 1
6. Paramagnetic coating 1 C 1 1
7. Improved wear resistance 1 C 1 1
8. Increased fire resistance or flame retardance 1 C 1 1
9. Barrier coatings, UV protection 1 C 1 1
Unit II: Nano Fibre Production & Improving Polymer Functionality 9
10. Electrospinning of Nanofibers 1 C 2 1,4
11. Producing nanofiber structures by electro spinning for tissue engineering, 1 C 2 1,4
12. Electrospun nanofiber spinning for tissue engineering, continuous yarns from
electro spun nanofiber 1 C 2 1,4
13. Controlling the morphologies of electro spun nanofiber 1 C 2 1,4
14. Structures by electro spinning nanofiber 1 C 2 1,4
15. Producing nanofiber structures by electro spinning for tissue engineering 1 C 2 1,4
16. Nanostructuring polymers with cyclodextrins, nanocomposites 1 C 2 1,4
17. Dyeable polypropylene via nanotechnology 1 C 2 1,4
18. Polyolefin/clay nanocomposites 1 C 2 1,4
Unit III: Carbon Nanotubes and Nano Composites in Textiles 8
19. Structure and properties of carbon nanotube- reinforced polymer 1 C 2,3 3,4
20. Carbon nanotube and nanofiber reinforced polymer 1 C 2,3 3,4
21. Structure and properties of CNT 1 C 2,3 3,4
22. Polymer fiber using melt spinning 1 C 2,3 3,4
23. Multifunctional polymer nanocomposites for Industrial applications fibres 1 C 2,3 3,4
24. Industrial applications fibres and Multiwall carbon nanotube 1 C 2,3 3,4
25. Nylon-6 nanocomposites from polymerization 1 C 2,3 3,4
26. Nano-filled polypropylene fibers 1 C 2,3 3,4
Unit IV: Nanocoatings and Surface Modification Techniques 8
27. Nanotechnologies for coating, structuring of textiles 1 C 3 2,5
28. Electrostatic self assembled nanolayer films for cotton fibers 1 C 3 2,5
29. Nanofabrication of thin polymer films 1 C 3 2,5
30. Nanolayers for surface modification of fibers 1 C 3 2,5
111 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
31. Hybrid polymer nanolayers for surface modification of fibers 1 C 3 2,5
32. Structure relationships of polypropylene nanocomposite fibers. 1 C 3 2,5
33. Property relationships of polypropylene nanocomposite fibers. 1 C 3 2,5
34. Applications polypropylene nanocomposites fibers 1 C 3 2,5
Unit V: Nano Finishing in Textiles 8
35. UV resistant, antibacterial 1 C 4 5
36. Hydrophilic, self-cleaning 1 C 4 5
37. Oil & soil repellent, dyeing 1 C 4 5
38. Photo chromic coating, flame retardant 1 C 4 5
39. Finishes-wound dressings 1 C 4 5
40. Protective nanotextiles 1 C 4 5
41. Bullet proof vests 1 C 4 5
42. Applications of nanotextiles 1 C 4 5
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test I 1
44. Cycle test II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1. Brown P.J., Stevens K., “Nanofiber and Nanotechnology in Textiles”, CRC Press, 2007
2. Mahltig B.,Textor T., “Nanosols & textiles”, World scientific, 2012
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
3. Mai Y-W., “Polymer Nano composites”, Wood head publishing, 2006
4. See ram Ramakrishna, “An introduction to electro spinning and Nanofibers”, World Scientific Publishing Co, 2005
5. Chang W.N., “Nanofiber fabrication, performance and applications”, Nova Science, 2009
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
112 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT409E Cancer Nanotechnology L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanobiotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
This course is intended to give the students an understanding of the principles of cancer biology by studying the
molecular and cellular basis of cancer and the tools from nanotechnology for cancer diagnostic, therapeutic
applications.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the biology behind cancer formation a
2. Know the various types of cancer and the genomics of them a c
3. Acquire knowledge about the role of nanotechnology in diagnostics and therapy of cancers d
4. Get acquainted with the current trend in cancer theranostics a c
Session Description of Topic Contact hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: The Biology of Cancer 9
1. The nature of cancer 1 C 1 1
2. Tumor viruses 1 C 1 1
3. Cellular oncogenes 1 C 1 1
4. Growth factors 1 C 1 1
5. Growth factor receptors & cancer 1 C 1 1
6. Cytoplasmic signaling circuitry programs: cancer traits 1 C 1 1
7. Tumor suppressor genes Prb 1 C 1 1
8. Control of the cell cycle clock 1 C 1 1
9. P53 & apoptosis: master guardian and executioner 1 C 1 1
Unit II: Cancer Biotechnology 9
10. Cell immortalization 1 C 1,2 1
11. Tumorigenesis & cancer development 1 C 1,2 1
12. The biology of angiogenesis 1 C 1,2 1
13. Invasion & metastasis 1 C 1,2 1
14. Types of cancers 1 C 1,2 2
15. Stem cells and cancer 1 C 1,2 2
16. Molecular genetics of cancer: chemical modifications of chromatin-
associated proteins 1 C 1,2 2
17. Genetic alterations in cancer cells: mutations 1 C 1,2 2
18. Chromosomal abnormalities 1 C 1,2 2
Unit III: Cancer Theranostics 8
19. Theranostic cancer biomarkers 1 C 3 3
20. Molecular imaging in cancer theranostics 1 C 3 3
21. Imaging-guided cancer therapy 1 C 3 3
22. Theranostic platforms, proteomics-based theranostics 1 C 3 3
23. Radionuclide imaging of cancer therapy 1 C 3 3
24. Bioluminescence imaging of cancer therapy 1 C 3 3
25. Magnetic resonance imaging of cancer therapy 1 C 3 3
26. Ultrasound imaging of cancer therapy 1 C 3 3
Unit IV: Nanotechnology in Cancer Diagnosis and Therapy 8
27. Magnetic nanoparticles as contrast agents for MRI application and
therapeutic application 1 C 3 1,3
28. Ultrasound-responsive nanoparticles as drug and gene delivery carriers 1 C 3 1,3
29. Noble metal nanoparticle platform 1 C 3 1,3
30. Cancer theranostics with carbon-based nanoplatforms and silica
nanoparticle platform 1 C 3 1,3
31. Polymer- and protein-based nanotechnologies for cancer theranostics 1 C 3 1,3
113 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
32. Scale-up production of theranostic nanoparticles 1 C 3 1,3
33. Market considerations 1 C 3 1,3
34. Nanotechnology and nanomedicine patenting systems 1 C 3 1,3
Unit V: Case Studies 8
35. Pancreatic cancer stem cells as new targets for diagnostics and therapy 1 C 3,4 4
36. Nanomedicine approaches for cancer stem cell targeting 1 C 3,4 4
37. Personalized cancer treatment and targeted iron oxide nanocomplex as a
theranostic agent 1 C 3,4 4
38. Local cancer therapy with magnetic nanoparticles 1 C 3,4 4
39. Parameters influencing the efficacy of magnetic heating of small breast
tumors 1 C 3,4 4
40. Galectins as targets for novel and specific antibody therapies in
gynecologic cancer therapies 1 C 3,4 4
41. Glycans and mucins as targets for novel and specific antibody therapies
in gynecologic cancer therapies 1 C 3,4 4
42. Commercial development of antibodies as drugs 1 C 3,4 4
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test I 1
44. Cycle test II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books, Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1. Robert A. Weinberg, “ The Biology of Cancer”, Garland Science, 2010
2. Raymond W. Ruddon, “Cancer Biology”, Oxford University press, 2007
3. Chen &Wong, “Cancer Theranostics”, Academic Press, 2014
4. Alexiou C. (Erlangen), “Nanomedicine - Basic and Clinical Applications in Diagnostics and Therapy”, Karger, 2011
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
114 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT410E Polymer Engineering L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanomaterials
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To study the aspects of processing, structure and properties of polymers needed in materials engineering designs
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Establish the engineering principles underlying the processing of polymer raw materials e
2. Provide understanding of underlying mechanisms of polymeric materials e
3. Extend and apply the knowledge of polymers to materials science and engineering d
4. Enhance knowledge about the various nanosynthesis techniques a
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours IOs Reference
Unit I: Basics of Polymeric Materials 9
1. Historical background 1 C 1-4 1,2
2. Polymer synthesis and structure 1 C 1-4 1,2
3. Addition polymers, condensation polymers - Copolymers 1 C 1 2
4. Cross linked polymers , crosslinking plasticizers and fillers 1 C 1 2
5. Molecular symmetry and tendency to form crystal 1 C 1 1,2
6. Crystallinity, glass transition temperature 1 C 1 1,2
7. Distribution of relative molecular mass 1 C 1 1,2
8. Determination of number and average molecular weight 1 C 1 1,2
9. Gel permeation chromatography 1 C 1 1,2
Unit II: Mechanical Behaviour of Polymers 9
10. Deformation and fracture in polymers 1 C 1,2 1
11. Crack growth 1 C 1,2 1
12. Cyclic deformations 1 C 1,2 1
13. Entropy elasticity, elasticity of a network 1 C 1,2 1,2
14. Stress, strain behaviour of polymers 1 C 1,2 1,2
15. Engineering rubbers 1 C 1,2 1,2
16. Structure property relationships for rubbery polymers, shear modulus 1 C 1,2 1,2,3
17. Bulk modulus, Young’s modulus 1 C,D 1,2 1,2,3
18. Friction and wear in polymers, mechanical behavior of biomedical
polymers 1 C 1,2 1,2,3
Unit III: Polymer Viscoelasticity and Rheology 8
19. Nature of viscoelasticity, creep 1 C 3 1,2
20. Stress relaxation, dynamic properties, Zener model 1 C 3 1,2
21. Polymer selection, stiffness, temperature dependence 1 C 3 1,2
22. stress analysis, stress relaxation and creep 1 C 3 1,2
23. Relaxation and retardation times 1 C 3 1,2
24. The time - temperature superposition principle 1 C 3 1,2
25. Polymer melt viscosity, polymer rheology 1 C,D 3 1,2
26. Overview of viscoelasticity and rheology 1 C 3 1,2
Unit IV: Reinforced Polymers and Composites 8
27. Introduction , reinforced plastics 1 C 3 2
28. Polymer matrices , fibrous reinforcement 1 C 3 2
29. Forming of reinforced plastics, protrusion 1 C 3 2
30. Compression moulding, reinforced thermoplastics 1 C 3 2
31. Classification and characteristics of composite materials: fibrous
composite materials 1 C 3,4 4,5
32. Laminated composite materials - particulate composite materials , 1 C 3,4 4,5
C-D-I-O
115 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
combinations of composite materials
33. Strength of composites , failure modes of long, fibre composites 1 C 3,4 5,4
34. Axial tensile failure, transverse tensile failure, shear failure - failure in
compression 1 C 3,4 5,4
Unit V: Elements of Design 8
35. Materials selection , the selection procedure 1 C 3,4 2,4
36. Engineering thermoplastics - thermosets and composites 1 C 3,4 2,4
37. Designing for manufacture 1 C,D 3,4 2,4
38. Injection moulding, joining and fastening 1 C 3,4 2,4
39. Thermosetting polymers 1 C 3,4 2,4
40. Designing for stiffness 1 C,D 3,4 2,4
41. Plastics,fibre composites 1 C 3,4 2,4
42. Rubbers, designing for strength 1 C,D 3,4 2,4
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test I 1
44. Cycle test II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No Text Books/Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1 Sperling L.H., "Introduction to Physical Polymer Science", Wiley inter science, 2006
2 Mc Crum, “Principles of polymer Engineering”, Oxford, 2001
3 Bicerano J., “Prediction of Polymer Properties”, Marcel Dekker, 2002
4 Jones R.M., “Mechanics of Composite Materials”, Taylor & Francis, 1999
5 HullD., and Clyne W., “An Introduction to Composite Materials”, Cambridge University Press, 1996
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool
Cycle test
I
Cycle test
II Cycle Test III
Surprise
Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
116 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
5NT411E Atomistic Modeling L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: 15NT205
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose The objective of this course is to make the learners understand various techniques and applications of atomic scale
modeling.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand large-scale atomistic modeling techniques a
2. Know importance for solving problems in modern engineering sciences a e
3. Demonstrate how atomistic modeling can be successfully applied to different fields of
materials science a
4. Introduce all aspects of atomistic modeling of materials including direct experience with
simulations of classical energy models, Monte Carlo sampling techniques , etc. a c
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours
C-D-
I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Basics of Modeling I 9
1. Classical mechanics, hamiltonians - coordinate systems 1 C 1 1,2
2. Potentials energy - basic pair potentials and their limitations 1 C 1 1,2
3. Calculation of elastic constants from potential function 1 C 1 1,2
4. Potentials for ionic systems, ceramics 1 C 1 1,2
5. Many -body potentials for metals 1 C 1 1,2
6. Many-body potentials for covalently bonded systems 1 C 1 1,2
7. Energy optimization 1 C 1 1,2,5,8
8. Molecular statics 1 C 1 1,2,5,8
9. Thermostatistics 1 C 1 1,2,5,8
Unit II: Basics of Modeling II 9
10. Setting up structures, key concepts: starting structure, electrons vs. nuclei 1 C 1 2,4
11. Born-Oppenheimer approximation, classical approximation 1 C 1 2,4
12. Pseudopotentials , K-points , Brillouin zone 1 C 1,2 2,4
13. K-point grids and Monkhorst-Pack mesh 1 C 1,2 2,4
14. Metals vs. insulators, symmetry, convergence and scaling with lattice parameters 1 C 1,2 2,4,7
15. Smearing of energy level occupations, optimization of electron density 1 C 1,2 2,4,7
16. The need for self-consistency 3 C 1,2 2,4,7
17. Optimization of structure, basis functions 1 C,D 1,2 2,4,7
18. Basis sets, energy cutoff, exchange-correlation function 1 C 1,2 2,4,7
Unit III: Molecular Dynamics 8
19. Integrating F=ma, time steps 1 C 3 2,3,7
20. The basic MD algorithm - The MD step 1 C 3 2,3,7
21. Taylor expansion, Verlet algorithms - choosing the time step 1 C 3 2,3,7
22. Predictor-corrector algorithm 1 C 3 1,2,3
23. MD in different ensembles, MD in constant temperature 1 C,D 3 1,2,3
24. Molecular dynamics in constant pressure 1 C 3 1,2,3
25. Energies: molecular statics 1 C 3 1,2,3
26. MD Simulation analysis -limitations 1 C 3 1,2,3
Unit IV: Monte Carlo Methods 8
27. Introduction - key concepts: starting structure - energy cutoff 1 C 4 1,2,3
28. State space sampling - classical momentum 1 C 4 1,2,3
29. Metropolis algorithm 1 C,D 4 1,2,7
30. Monte Carlo simulation analysis –limitations 1 C,D 4 1,2,7
31. Introducing ensemble sin MC, kinetic Monte Carlo 1 C 4 1,2,6,7
32. Key concepts: starting structure in MD, KMC 1 C,D 4 2,6,7
117 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
33. Convergence and scaling with lattice parameters 1 C 4 1,2,6,7
34. Understanding the electronic structure, electrical conductivity, excited electron states 1 C,D 4 2,6,7
Unit V: Density Functional Theory 8
35. Introduction to DFT, Kohn-Sham theorem 1 C 3,4 1,2,6,7
36. Exchange-correlation functions and LDA/GGA, accuracy of LDA/GGA 1 C,D 3,4 2,6,7
37. Basic output of QM code (energies, electronic structure), 1 C 3,4 1,2,6
38. Using the energies: molecular statics, MD, MC 1 C,D 3,4 1,2,6
39. Using the electronic structure: optical properties (transitions between electronic states) 1 C 3,4 1,2,6
40. Electrical conductivity (mobility of electrons, scattering of electrons between states) 1 C 3,4 1,2,6
41. Excited electron states due to thermal (or optical) excitations, Type of bonding -
tunneling rates 1 C 3,4 1,2,6
42. Understanding the electronic structure: wave functions, charge density, band structure,
density of states 1 C,D 3,4 2,6,7
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test I 1
44. Cycle test II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1. Jörg-Rüdiger Hill, Lalitha Subramanian and Amitesh Maiti, “Molecular modeling techniques in
material sciences”, Taylor & Francis/CRC Press: Boca Raton, 2005
2. Andrew R. Leach, “Molecular modelling: principles and application”, Pearson Education, India, 2001
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
3. Daan Frenkel and Berend Smit, “Understanding molecular simulation: from algorithms to applications”, Academic
Press, 2001
4. David S. Sholl and Janice A. Steckel, “Density functional theory: a practical introduction”, John Wiley & Sons Inc.,
2009
5. David Chandler, “Introduction to modern statistical mechanics”, Oxford University Press, 1987
6. Martin, R. “Electronic Structure: Basic Theory and Practical Methods”, Cambridge University Press, 2004
7. Thijssen, J.M. “Computational Physics”, Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 2000
8. Donald A. McQuarrie, “Statistical mechanics”, University Science Books, 2000
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
118 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT412E Societal Implications of Nanotechnology L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
The goal of this course is to provide an insight into the fundamentals of ethical, social and political impact of
nanotechnology. It will also guide the students to understand how Nanotechnology has broader societal
implications and social challenges.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the basic knowledge on social, ethical & political impact of nanoscience and
nanotechnology
a c
2. Acquire the knowledge of various regulatory reactions to nanotechnology outcome f
3. Create awareness related to ethical issues in the future nanotechnology research h
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours
C-D-
I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Economic Impacts and Commercialization of Nanotechnology 9
1. Introduction to societal implications of nanotechnology 1 C 1 1
2. Socio-economic impact of nanoscale science: initial results and nanobank 1 C 1 1
3. Managing the nanotechnology revolution: consider the malcolm baldrige
national quality criteria 1 C 1 1
4. The emerging nanoeconomy: key drivers, challenges, and opportunities 1 C 1 1
5. Transcending Moore’s law with molecular electronics 1 C 1 1
6. Transcending Moore’s law with nanotechnology 1 C 1 1
7. Semiconductor scaling as a model for nanotechnology commercialization 1 C 1 1
8. Sustaining the impact of nanotechnology on productivity 1 C 1 1
9. Sustaining the impact of nanotechnology on sustainability, and equity 1 C 1 1
Unit II -Ethics, Law & Governance 9
10. Ethics and law 1 C 1,2 1
11. Ethical issues in nanoscience and nanotechnology: reflections and suggestions 1 C 1,2 1
12. Ethics and nano: a survey-law in a new frontier- an exploration of patent
matters associated with nanotechnology 1 C 1,2 1
13. The ethics of ethics 1 C 1,2 1
14. Negotiations over quality of life in the nanotechnology initiative. Governance 1 C 1,2 1
15. Problems of governance of nanotechnology 1 C 1,2 1
16. Societal implications of emerging science and technologies: a research agenda
for science and technology studies (STS) 1 C 1,2 1
17. Institutional impacts of government science initiatives 1 C 1,2 1
18. Nanotechnology for national security 1 C 1,2 1
Unit III- Social Scenarios 8
19. Introduction-social scenarios 1 C 1-3 2
20. Navigating nanotechnology through society 1 C 1-3 2
21. Nanotechnology, surveillance, and society 1 C 1-3 2
22. Methodological issues and innovations for social research 1 C 1-3 2
23. Nanotechnology: societal implications: individual perspectives 1 C 1-3 2
24. Nanotechnology and social trends; Five nanotech social scenarios 1 C 1-3 2
25. Technological revolutions and the limits of ethics in an age of
commercialization 1 C 1-3 2
26. Vision, innovation, and policy 3 C 1-3 2
Unit IV: Converging Technologies 8
27. Introduction – converging technologies I C 1 2
28. Nanotechnology’s implications for the quality of life 1 C 1 2
119 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
29. Management of innovation for convergent technologies 1 C 1 2
30. The "integration/penetration model" 1 C 1 2
31. Social impacts of nanobiotechnology issues 1 C 1 2
32. The use of analogies for interdisciplinary research in the convergence of nano-
, bio-, and information technology 1 C 1 2
33. Converging technologies: innovation, legal risks, and society 1 C 1 2
34. Short-term implications of convergence for scientific and engineering
disciplines 1 C 1 2
Unit V: Public Perceptions & Education 8
35. Public perceptions-societal implications of nanoscience 1 C 1,2 3
36. An agenda for public interaction research, Communicating nanotechnological
risks 1 C 1,2 3
37. A proposal to advance understanding of nanotechnology’s social impacts 1 C 1,2 3
38. Nanotechnology in the media: a preliminary analysis 1 C 1,2 3
39. Public engagement with nanoscale science and engineering 1 C 1,2 3
40. Nanotechnology: moving beyond risk- communication streams and
nanotechnology: the (Re) interpretation of a new technology nanotechnology 1 C 1,2 3
41. Societal implications- individual perspectives 1 C 1,2 3
42. Historical comparisons for anticipating public reactions to nanotechnology 1 C 1,2 3
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test I 1
44. Cycle test II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. Text Books/ Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1. Mihail C.R., and William S.B., “Nanotechnology: societal implications”, Springer publication, 2011
2. Ronald sandler, “Nanotechnology the Social & Ethical Issues”, Woodrow Wilson, 2009
3. Mihail C. Roco and William Sims Bainbridge,” Societal Implications of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology”, National
Science Foundation, 2001
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
120 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT413E Nanotechnology in Tissue Engineering L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Departmnt Elective Nanobiotechnology
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To provide an understanding of basic principles of Tissue engineering and involvement of nanotechnology
associated with repair or replacing portions of tissue or whole organ that is diseased or damaged.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the general scientific concepts of tissue engineering a
2. Know the various tissue culture techniques a c
3. Acquire knowledge about the role of nanotechnology in tissue engineering and regenerative
medicine d
4. Get acquainted with the current trend in tissue engineering and regenerative technology a c
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Principles of Tissue Engineering 9
1. The Cell 1 C 1 1,2
2. Tissue types 1 C 1 1,2
3. Extracellular matrix 1 C 1 1,2
4. Emergence of tissue 1 C 1 1,2
5. Regeneration 1 C 1 1,2
6. Concept of tissue construction 1 C 1 1,2
7. Stem cells- types 1 C 1 1,2
8. Stem cells properties and source 1 C 1 1,2
9. Cell therapies 1 C 1 1,2
Unit II: Tissue Culture Basics 9
10. First Cultures: culture containers, media 1 C 1,2 1,2,4
11. Growth factors 1 C 1,2 1,2,4
12. Cell Culture Techniques: hybridomas 1 C 1,2 1,2,4
13. Cardiomyocites cultivation 1 C 1,2 1,2,4
14. Cryopreservation 1 C 1,2 1,2,4
15. Tissue culture: Migration 1 C 1,2 1,2,4
16. Tissue culture: new formation 1 C 1,2 1,2,4
17. Organ culture: principles 1 C 1,2 1,2,4
18. Formation of organ from tissue 1 C 1,2 1,2,4
Unit III: Nanobiomaterials and Tissue Engineering 8
19. Characteristics and design of biomaterials 1 C,D 3 2,3
20. Fundamental aspects of tissue responses to biomaterials 1 C 3 2,3
21. Types of tissue responses 1 C 3 2,3
22. Evaluation of biomaterial behavior 1 C 3 2,3
23. Properties of biomaterials assessed through in vivo experiments 1 C 3 2,3
24. Hydrogels- types of hydrogels used in tissue engineering and chitosan as
biomaterial for tissue engineering 1 C 3 2,3
25. Nanobiomaterials for regeneration: Carbon nanobomaterials, self assembling
nanobomaterials 1 C 3 2,3
26. Polymeric and ceramic nanobiomaterials 1 C 3 2,3
Unit IV: Nanofibres in Tissue Engineering 8
27. Electrospinning: Experimental setup and basic principle 1 C 3 3,1
28. Effects of parameters on electrospinning 1 C 3 3,1
29. Biomedical Applications of electrospun nanofibres 1 C 3 3,1
30. Nanofibres as 3D scaffold for tissue regeneration 1 C 3 3,1
31. Nanofibre scaffolds for interface regeneration 1 C 3 3,1
121 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
32. Techniques to improve porosity and cell infiltration 1 C 3 3,1
33. Hybrid fibres for bone, ligament and tendon regeneration 1 C 3 3,1
34. Bioactive nanofibres, Methods for immobilizing biomolecules 1 C 3 3,1
Unit V – 3D Bio Printing For Scaffolds 8
35. 3D Bioprinting – introduction, principles 1 C 4 4
36. 3D Bioprinting technologies: ink jet based and pressure assisted bioprinting 1 C 4 4
37. Laser assisted and solenoid valve based 3D printing 1 C 4 4
38. Acoustic jet based 3D printing 1 C 4 4
39. Challenges and future development of 3D bio printing 1 C 4 4
40. CAM/CAD laser bio printing 1 C 4 4
41. Laser direct write for bioprinting 1 C 4 4
42. Materials used for bio printing, applications 1 C 4 4
Assessment 3
43. Cycle test I 1
44. Cycle test II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1. Will W.M., Raimund Strehl, Karl Schumacher, “Tissue Engineering: From Cell Biology to Artificial Organs”, Wiley-
VCH, 2005
2. Ketul Popat,“Nanotechnology in Tissue Engineering and Regenerative Medicine”, CRC Press/Taylor and Francis, 2011
3. Reference Books/Other Reading Material
4. Sabu Thomas, Yves Grohens, Neethu Ninan, “Nanotechnology applications for tissue engineering”, 2015
5. Lijie Grace Zhang, John P Fisher, Kam Leong,“3D Bioprinting and Nanotechnology in Tissue Engineering and
Regenerative medicine”, Elsevier, 2015
6. Antoniac (Ed.), IulianVasile (Ed.), “Biologically Responsive Biomaterials for Tissue Engineering”, SpringerSeries in
Biomaterials Science and Engineering, Vol.1, Springer, 2012.
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
122 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15NT318E Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category P Department Elective Nanoelelctronics
Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose
Nanoelectronics are emerging technologies with wide range of inter disciplinary applications. The major goals and
objectives are to provide the fundamental principles of nanoelectronics and the utilization of nanostructures as
nanoelectronic devices.
Instructional Objectives STUDENT OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Understand the Fundamentals of nanoelectronics a
2. Get insight on materials and fabrication of nanostructures. a e
3. Make the learner familiarize with concepts of electron transport in nanostructures. a e
4. Understand the working of various nanoelectronic devices a e
Session Description of Topic Contact
hours
C-D-I-
O IOs Reference
Unit I: Physics of Nanoelectronics 9
1. The changing landscape of micro/ nanoelectronics 1 C 1 1-3
2. The region of nanostructures 1 C 1 1-3
3. Beyond CMOS 1 C 1 1-3
4. More than Moore 1 C 1 1-3
5. Classical particles, classical waves 1 C 1 1-3
6. Wave–particle duality, Heisenberg uncertainty principle 1 C 1 1-3
7. Electrons behaving as waves (Schrödinger equation) 1 C 1 1-3
8. Scattering and bound states 1 C 1 1-3
9. Atoms to crystals- bands and bonds 1 C 1 1-3
Unit II: Materials and Fabrication of Nanostructures 9
10. Semiconductors 1 C 2 1-3
11. Semiconductor heterostructures 1 C 2 1-3
12. Lattice-matched heterostructures 1 C 2 1-3
13. Pseudomorphic heterostructures 1 C 2 1-3
14. Organic semiconductors 1 C 2 1-3
15. Carbon nanomaterials 1 C 2 1-3
16. Nanolithography 1 C 2 1-3
17. Etching 1 C 2 1-3
18. Other means forfabrication of nanostructures and nanodevices 1 C 2 1-3
Unit III: Electron Transport in Nanostructures 8
19. Time scales of the electrons in solids 1 C 3 1-3
20. length scales of the electrons in solids 1 C 3 1-3
21. Statistics of the electrons in solids and nanostructures :Classical 1 C 3 1-3
22. Statistics of the electrons in solids and nanostructures: Fermi 1 C 3 1-3
23. The density of states of electrons in nanostructures 1 C 3 1-3
24. Classical transport: classical resistance and conductance 1 C 3 1-3
25. Quantum ballistic transport: quantum Resistance and conductance 1 C 3 1-3
26. Transport of spin, spintronic devices and applications 1 C 3 1-3
123 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Unit IV: Tunneling Devices 8
27. Tunneling through a potential barrier 1 C 4 1-3
28. Potential energy profiles for material interfaces 1 C 4 1-3
29. Metal - insulator, metal - semiconductor 1 C 4 1-3
30. Metal – insulator - metal junctions 1 C 4 1-3
31. Tunneling diode (TD) and Resonant tunneling diode (RTD) 1 C 4 1-3
32. Three-terminal resonant tunneling devices 1 C 4 1-3
33. Technology of RTD 1 C 4 1-3
34. Inverter and logic OR gates based on RTD 1 C 4 1-3
Unit V: Single Electron and other Nanoelctronic Devices 8
35. Coulomb blockade 1 C 4 1-3
36. Tunnel junction excited by a current source 1 C 4 1-3
37. Performance of the single-electron transistor 1 C 4 1-3
38. SET technology and Field effect transistors 1 C 4 1-3
39. Carbon nanotube transistors (FETs and SETs) 1 C 4 1-3
40. Semiconductor nanowire SETs and FETs 1 C 4 1-3
41. Molecular SETs and molecular electronics 1 C 4 1-3
42. Quantum dot cellular automata 1 C 4 1-3
ASSESSMENT 3
43. Cycle test-I 1
44. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books/Reference Books/Other Reading Material
1. Vladimir V. Mitin, Viatcheslav A. Kochelap, Michael A. Stroscio, “Introduction to Nanoelectronics: Science,
Nanotechnology, Engineering, and Applications”, Cambridge University Press, 2012
2. George W. Hanson, “Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics”, Prentice Hall, 2007
3. Karl Goser, Peter GlÖsekötter, Jan Dienstuhl, “Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems”, Springer, 2004
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
124 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15EI251 Electronics and Instrumentation L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: NIL
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category E Engineering Sciences Electronics Engineering
Course designed by Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- 2016
Purpose The aim of the course is to familiarize the student with the principle of operation, capabilities and limitation of
Electronics and Instrumentation so that he will be able to use this knowledge effectively.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Design rectifiers and voltage stabilizer circuits a b e
2. Analyze various biasing methods of Transistor a
3. Know the usage of Semiconductor Devices for high power applications a b e
4. Understand the Basic of Measurement System a
5. Use of Primary sensing element and Signal Conditioning unit a e
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours
C-D-
I-O IOs Reference
Unit 1 Semiconductor Diode 9
1. Semiconductor diode – crystal diode as a rectifier – equivalent circuit of a
crystal diode 2 C,D 1 1,3
2. Half wave rectifier – efficiency of half wave rectifier 2 C 1 1,3
3. Full wave rectifier – center tap full wave rectifier 1 C,D 1 1,3
4. Full wave bridge rectifier – efficiency of full wave bridge rectifier 2 C,D 1 1,3
5. Zener diode – equivalent circuit of Zener diode – Zener diode as a voltage
regulator 2 C 1 1,3
Unit II: Transistor and its Biasing 9
6. Transistor symbols – transistor as an amplifier – connections 2 C 2 1,4
7. CB, CE and CC characteristics – comparison of transistor connections 2 C 2 1,4
8. Transistor as an amplifier in CE arrangement – transistor load line analysis –
operating point 2 C,D 2 1,4
9. CE Circuit - performance of transistor amplifier - cut off and saturation points 2 C 2 1,4
10. Transistor biasing: methods of transistor biasing - base resistor method -
biasing with feedback resistor - voltage divider bias method . 1 C,D 2 1,4
Unit III: FET, SCR AND UJT 8
11. Types of field effect transistor - JFET - working principles of JFET 2 C 3 1,5
12. JFET as an amplifier and its output characteristics - JFET applications 2 C 3 1,5
13. MOSFET working principle - SCR - equivalent circuit and V-I characteristics.
scr as a half wave and full wave rectifier 3 C 3 1,5
14. Application of SCR - TRIAC and DIAC characteristics and its applications,
UJT - equivalent circuit of a UJT and its characteristics - tutorial 1 C 3 1,5
Unit IV: Measurement System 8
15. Measurements and its significance, methods of measurements, classification
of instruments and application 4 C 4 2,8
16.
Elements of a generalized measurement system, static and dynamic
characteristics of an instruments, Errors in measurement systems - units,
system, dimension and standards
4 C,D 4 2,8
Unit V: Primary Sensing Elements and Signal Conditioning 8
17. Introduction - transducers - advantage of electric transducers, classification
based upon principle of transduction 3 C 5 2,8
18.
Primary and secondary transducer, passive and active transducers, analog and
digital transducers, transducers and inverse transducers and examples for each.
Characteristics and choice of transducers
3 C 5 2,8
19. Input,transfer and output characteristics and its application. operational 2 C 5 2,8
125 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
amplifier, Characteristics of operational amplifier, basic filters, A/D
converters. simple types
Assessment 3
20. Cycle test-I 1
21. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. Text Books
1. Mehta.V.K, and Rohit Metha, “Principles of Electronics”, S. Chand & Company Ltd., First Edition, 2010
2. Sawhney. A.K, “A Course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai Sons, New
Delhi, 2012
Reference Books/Other Reading Material
3. Millman and Halkias, “Electronic devices and Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill International Edition, 2010
4. Mithal.G.K, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,2008
5. Salivahanan.S, Sureshkumar.N, and Vallavaraj.A, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Tata McGraw - Hill, New Delhi,
2011
6. Sze.S.M, “Semiconductor Devices - Physics and Technology”, 2nd Edtion, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2006
7. Ben G. Streetman and Sanjay Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic Devices”, Pearson Education, 2009
8. Ernest O. Doebelin, “Measurement Systems - Application and Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2011
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
126 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15EI251L Electronics and Instrumentation Laboratory L T P C
0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: 15EI251
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category E Engineering Sciences Electronics Engineering
Course designed by Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
PURPOSE To develop skills in designing and conducting experiments related to applications of principles of physics in
engineering
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Familiarize with the concepts and working of basic electronic components a b k
2. Understand the concepts of sensors a b k
Sl. No. Description of experiments Contact
hours
C-D-
I-O IOs Reference
1. Characteristics of semiconductor diode & Zener diode 2 D,I 1 1,2
2. Characteristics of BJT in CE & CB Configuration 2 C,D 1 1,2
3. Characteristics of FET 2 D 1 1,2
4. Characteristics of SCR 2 D 1 1,2
5. Characteristics of DIAC & UJT 2 D 1 1,2
6. Characteristics of RTD 2 D,I 2 1,3
7. Characteristics of thermistor 2 D,I 2 1,3
8. Characteristics of thermocouple 2 D,I 2 1,3
9. Characteristics of load cell 2 D,I 2 1,3
10. Characteristics of strain gauge 2 D,I 2 1,3
Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 30
LEARNING RESOURCES
Sl.
No. REFERENCES
1. Laboratory Manual
2. VK Mehtha , “ Principles of Electronics”, S Chand; 7th Edition , 2005
3. A.K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney, “Electrical Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai & Co, 2013
Course nature Practical
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester
Assessment
tool Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Voce Model examination Total
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%
127 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15ME216 Introduction to Manufacturing Engineering L T P C
2 0 0 2
Co-requisite: Nil
Prerequisite: Nil
Data Book / Codes/Standards Nil
Course Category E Engineering Sciences Mechanical Engineering
Course designed by Department of Mechanical Engineering
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 24th March 2016
Purpose To make the students aware of different manufacturing processes like machining process, metal forming,
casting, welding and powder metallurgy.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
1. To study the various machining processes. a c
2. To understand the concept of casting, welding and powder metallurgy. a c
3. To have the ability of understanding the mechanical working of metals. a c
Session Description of Topic
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Machining 8
1. Introduction and description of lathe, types of lathes 1 C 1 1,2,3
2. Capstan and turret lathe, specification of a lathe 1 C 1 1,2,3
3. Lathe operations like step turning, facing parting off, taper turning, knurling 1 C 1 1,2,3
4. Description and principle of drilling 1 C 1 1,3
5. Drilling operations like reaming, counter boring, counter sinking, tapping,
etc. 1 C 1 1,3
6. Types of drills and their features 1 C 1 1,3
7. Introduction, principle and classification of milling 1 C 1 1,2,3
8. Milling machine operations and tools with their features 1 C 1 1,2,3
Unit II: Casting, Welding And Powder Metallurgy 9
9. Introduction to casting 1 C 2 1,2,4,5
10. Types of pattern, pattern materials, pattern allowances 1 C 2 1,2,4,5
11. Types of moulding and moulding sand 1 C 2 1,2,4,5
12. Gating and risering, cores and core making 1 C 2 1,2,4,5
13. Shell, investment casting 1 C 2 1,2,4,5
14. Die casting, centrifugal casting 1 C 2 1,2,4,5
15. Special welding like laser welding, electron beam welding 1 C 2 1,4,5
16. Ultrasonic welding, electro slag welding, Friction welding, electrical
resistance welding 1 C 2 1,4,5
17. Principle of powder metallurgy, powder manufacture, Blending, compaction,
sintering, finishing and applications 1 C 2 1,2,4,5
Unit III: Metal Formimg 10
18. Hot and Cold Working and Rolling 1 C 3 1,2,6,7
19. Forging 1 C 3 1,2,6,7
20. Wire drawing 1 C 3 1,2,6,7
21. Extrusion and types like forward, backward and tube extrusion 1 C 3 1,2,6,7
22. Sheet metal operations like shearing, blanking 1 C 3 1,2,6,7
23. Piercing, punching, trimming, stretch forming 1 C 3 1,2,6,7
24. Bending with bending length and bending force calculations and simple
problems 1 C,D 3 1,2,6,7
25. Drawing with blank size calculation, draw ratio and drawing force
calculations 1 C,D 3 1,2,6,7
26. Tube forming, Embossing and coining 1 C 3 1,2,6,7
27. Types of dies like progressive, compound and combination dies 1 C 3 1,2,6,7
Assessment 3
28. Cycle test-I 1
29. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 30
128 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
Learning Resources
Sl. No. Text Books
1. Sharma P.C, "A Text Book of Production Engineering", S.Chand and Co. Ltd., 8thEdition, 2014
2. Rao.P.N, “Manufacturing Technology, Vol I & II”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 3rdEdition, 2010
REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL
3. Hajra Choudry S.K, Bose S.K, “Elements of Workshop Technology Vol II”, Media Promoters and Publishers Pvt. Ltd.,
Mumbai, 2010
4. Kalpakjian, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, Addison Wesley Congmen Pvt. Ltd., Singapore, 4th Edition,
2009
5. De Garmo et al., "Materials and Processes in Manufacturing", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,11thEdition, 2011
6. Jain. R. K., “Production Technology: Manufacturing Process”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 17th Edition, 2011
7. Chapman W. A. J., “Workshop Technology Vol. I and II”, Arnold Publisher, New Delhi, 2001
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage : 50%
129 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15MH311 Elements of Mechatronics Systems L T P C
3 0 0 3
Co-requisite: 15MH312L - Mechatronics Systems Laboratory
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category E Engineering Sciences Mechatronics Engineering
Course designed by Department of Mechatronics Engineering
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To impart the knowledge of elements of mechatronics systems in a structured way.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Explain the components of mechatronics systems a
2. Understand the nano electro mechanical systems and its fabrication techniques a d
3. Classify the sensors, actuators and apply them into various applications. a
Session Description of Topics
Contact
hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference
Unit I: Introduction to Mechatronics Systems 7
1. Introduction to mechatronics systems 1 C 1 1
2. Key elements of mechatronics systems 2 C 1 1
3. Measurement Systems: ADC and DAC 1 C 1 1
4. Operation of open and closed loop systems 1 C 1 1
5. Water level control and shaft speed control 1 C 1 1
6. Washing machine control 1 C 1 1
Unit II: Nanoelectromechanical Systems (NEMS) 7
7. Overview of micro and nanoelectromechanical systems 1 C 2 2
8. NEMS: Fabrication techniques 2 C 2 2
9. NEMS / MEMS: Motion dynamics 2 C,D 2 2
10. NEMS: Devices and applications 2 C 2 2
Unit III: Sensors 11
11. Resistive sensors: Types, working principles 1 C 1,3 1
12. Capacitive sensors: Types, working principles 1 C 1,3 1
13. Inductive transducers: Types, working principle 1 C 1,3 1
14. Nano sensor: Parameters and characteristics 1 C 1,3 3
15. Necessity of nano scale measurements, classification of nanosensors 1 C 1,3 3
16. Magneto resistance nano sensor, Hall effect 1 C 1,3 3
17. NEMS accelerometer, silicon nanowire accelerometer 1 C 1,3 3
18. Optical displacement nano sensor, magneto motive displacement nano
sensor 2 C 1,3 3
19. Piezoresistive and piezoelectric displacement nanosensor 1 C 1,3 3
20. Carbon nanowire on diamond resistive temperature nanosensor 1 C 1,3 3
Unit IV: Electrical Drives 9
21. DC motor: Construction, working principle and characteristics 2 C 1,3 1
22. Solenoids and relay : Construction, working principle and applications 1 C 1,3 1
23. Stepper motors: Construction, working principle, types and applications 2 C 1,3 1
24. Servo motors : Construction, working principle, types and applications 2 C 1,3 1
25. Piezo resistive and piezo electric actuators 2 C 1,3 3
Unit V: Applications of Mechatronics Systems 8
26. Car park barriers 1 C 1,2,3 4
27. Bar code reader 2 C 1,2,3 4
28. Coin counting machine 1 C 1,2,3 4
29. Nano robots: Past, present and future 1 C 1,3 1
30. Nano mechanical cantilever based manipulation for sensing and imaging, 1 C 1,3 1
31. Swam of self organized nano robots 2 C 1,3 1
Assessment 3
130 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
32. Cycle test-I 1
33. Cycle test-II 2
Total contact hours 45
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. Text Books
1. Bolton, W., “Mechatronics”, Addison Wesley, 2nd Edition, New Delhi, 1999
2. Vinod Kumar Khanna., “Nanosensors: Physical, Chemical and Biological”, CRC press, 2012
Reference Books / Other Reading Materials
3. Gabor L. Hornyak., John J. Moore., H.F. Tibbals, Joydeep Dutta., “Fundamentals of Nanotechnology”, CRC Press, 2009
4. Constantinos Mavroidis., Antoine Ferreira., “Nanorobotics: Current Approaches and Techniques”, Springer 2013
Course nature Theory
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total
Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50%
End semester examination Weightage 50%
131 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015
15MH312L Mechatronics Systems Laboratory L T P C
0 0 2 1
Co-requisite: 15MH311
Prerequisite: NIL
Data Book /
Codes/Standards NIL
Course Category E Engineering Sciences Mechatronics Engineering
Course designed by Department of Mechatronics Engineering
Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016
Purpose To impart knowledge of understanding the characteristics of key elements of mechatronics system.
Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Recall the key elements of mechatronics system a
2. Analyze the characteristics of various sensors a b
3. Apply the sensors and actuators into various applications a
Sl.
No. Description of experiments
Contact
hours
C-D-I-
O IOs Reference
1. Introduction to Labview (Simple Labview programs) 2 C 1 1
2. Introduction to Labview (Usage of loops, structures) 2 C 1 1
3. Calibration of strain gauge, infrared sensor and sonar sensor (Quanser
QNET) 2 C,I,O 2 1
4. Calibration of pressure sensor ad potentiometer (Quanser - QNET) 2 C,I,O 2 1
5. Calibration of magnetic field sensor, temperature sensor and piezo film
sensor (Quanser QNET) 2 C,I,O 2 1
6. Determination the performance characteristics of analog to digital
converter (3 bit and 4 bit converters) 2 I,O 1 1
7. Determination of performance characteristics of digital to analog
characteristics (unipolar, bipolar-3bit converter) 2 I,O 1 1
8. Coin operated car park barrier using electro pneumatic 2 D,I,O 3 1
9. Machine vision system 2 C,D,I,O 2 1
10. DC motor control (Quanser QNET) 2 C,I,O 3 1
11. Performance characteristics of (K, J Type) thermocouple using
multifunctional DAC card (Test rig) 2 C 2 1
12. Measurement of thermal conductivity using multifunctional DAC card
(Test rig) 2 C 2 1
Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 30
Learning Resources
Sl.
No. References
1 Mechatronics Laboratory Course Material, 2016
Course nature Practical
Assessment Method (Weightage 100%)
In-semester
Assessment
tool Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Voce Model examination Total
Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60%
End semester examination Weightage : 40%